Lincoln Electric Welding System NA 5N User Manual

SVM131-A  
July, 1997  
NA-5  
AUTOMATIC WELDING SYSTEMS  
For use with the following models:  
NA-5N  
NA-5NF  
NA-5S  
NA-5SF  
Safety Depends on You  
Lincoln arc welding and cutting  
equipment is designed and built  
with safety in mind. However,  
your overall safety can be  
increased by proper installation  
... and thoughtful operation on  
your part. DO NOT INSTALL,  
OPERATE OR REPAIR THIS  
EQUIPMENT WITHOUT READ-  
ING THIS MANUAL AND THE  
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CON-  
TAINED THROUGHOUT. And,  
most importantly, think before  
you act and be careful.  
SERVICE MANUAL  
World's Leader in Welding and Cutting Products  
Premier Manufacturer of Industrial Motors  
Sales and Service through Subsidiaries and Distributors Worldwide  
22801 St. Clair Ave. Cleveland, Ohio 44117-1199 U.S.A. Tel. (216) 481-8100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ii  
ii  
SAFETY  
ARC RAYS can burn.  
ELECTRIC SHOCK can kill.  
3.a. The electrode and work (or ground) circuits  
are electrically “hot” when the welder is on.  
Do not touch these “hot” parts with your bare  
skin or wet clothing. Wear dry, hole-free  
gloves to insulate hands.  
4.a. Use a shield with the proper filter and cover  
plates to protect your eyes from sparks and  
the rays of the arc when welding or observing  
open arc welding. Headshield and filter lens  
should conform to ANSI Z87. I standards.  
4.b. Use suitable clothing made from durable flame-resistant  
material to protect your skin and that of your helpers from  
the arc rays.  
3.b. Insulate yourself from work and ground using dry insulation.  
Make certain the insulation is large enough to cover your full  
area of physical contact with work and ground.  
4.c. Protect other nearby personnel with suitable, non-flammable  
screening and/or warn them not to watch the arc nor expose  
themselves to the arc rays or to hot spatter or metal.  
In addition to the normal safety precautions, if welding  
must be performed under electrically hazardous  
conditions (in damp locations or while wearing wet  
clothing; on metal structures such as floors, gratings or  
scaffolds; when in cramped positions such as sitting,  
kneeling or lying, if there is a high risk of unavoidable or  
accidental contact with the workpiece or ground) use  
the following equipment:  
FUMES AND GASES  
can be dangerous.  
5.a. Welding may produce fumes and gases  
hazardous to health. Avoid breathing these  
• Semiautomatic DC Constant Voltage (Wire) Welder.  
• DC Manual (Stick) Welder.  
• AC Welder with Reduced Voltage Control.  
fumes and gases.When welding, keep  
your head out of the fume. Use enough  
ventilation and/or exhaust at the arc to keep  
3.c. In semiautomatic or automatic wire welding, the electrode,  
electrode reel, welding head, nozzle or semiautomatic  
welding gun are also electrically “hot”.  
fumes and gases away from the breathing zone. When  
welding with electrodes which require special  
ventilation such as stainless or hard facing (see  
instructions on container or MSDS) or on lead or  
cadmium plated steel and other metals or coatings  
which produce highly toxic fumes, keep exposure as  
low as possible and below Threshold Limit Values (TLV)  
using local exhaust or mechanical ventilation. In  
confined spaces or in some circumstances, outdoors, a  
respirator may be required. Additional precautions are  
also required when welding on galvanized steel.  
3.d. Always be sure the work cable makes a good electrical  
connection with the metal being welded. The connection  
should be as close as possible to the area being welded.  
3.e. Ground the work or metal to be welded to a good electrical  
(earth) ground.  
3.f. Maintain the electrode holder, work clamp, welding cable and  
welding machine in good, safe operating condition. Replace  
damaged insulation.  
5.b. Do not weld in locations near chlorinated hydrocarbon vapors  
coming from degreasing, cleaning or spraying operations.  
The heat and rays of the arc can react with solvent vapors to  
form phosgene, a highly toxic gas, and other irritating  
products.  
3.g. Never dip the electrode in water for cooling.  
3.h. Never simultaneously touch electrically “hot” parts of  
electrode holders connected to two welders because voltage  
between the two can be the total of the open circuit voltage  
of both welders.  
5.c. Shielding gases used for arc welding can displace air and  
cause injury or death. Always use enough ventilation,  
especially in confined areas, to insure breathing air is safe.  
3.i. When working above floor level, use a safety belt to protect  
yourself from a fall should you get a shock.  
5.d. Read and understand the manufacturer’s instructions for this  
equipment and the consumables to be used, including the  
material safety data sheet (MSDS) and follow your  
employer’s safety practices. MSDS forms are available from  
your welding distributor or from the manufacturer.  
3.j. Also see Items 6.c. and 8.  
5.e. Also see item 1.b.  
Mar ‘95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iii  
iii  
SAFETY  
WELDING SPARKS can  
cause fire or explosion.  
CYLINDER may explode  
if damaged.  
6.a. Remove fire hazards from the welding area.  
If this is not possible, cover them to prevent  
7.a. Use only compressed gas cylinders  
containing the correct shielding gas for the  
the welding sparks from starting a fire.  
Remember that welding sparks and hot  
materials from welding can easily go through small cracks  
and openings to adjacent areas. Avoid welding near  
hydraulic lines. Have a fire extinguisher readily available.  
process used and properly operating  
regulators designed for the gas and  
pressure used. All hoses, fittings, etc. should be suitable for  
the application and maintained in good condition.  
7.b. Always keep cylinders in an upright position securely  
chained to an undercarriage or fixed support.  
6.b. Where compressed gases are to be used at the job site,  
special precautions should be used to prevent hazardous  
situations. Refer to “Safety in Welding and Cutting” (ANSI  
Standard Z49.1) and the operating information for the  
equipment being used.  
7.c. Cylinders should be located:  
Away from areas where they may be struck or subjected to  
physical damage.  
6.c. When not welding, make certain no part of the electrode  
circuit is touching the work or ground. Accidental contact can  
cause overheating and create a fire hazard.  
•A safe distance from arc welding or cutting operations and  
any other source of heat, sparks, or flame.  
7.d. Never allow the electrode, electrode holder or any other  
electrically “hot” parts to touch a cylinder.  
6.d. Do not heat, cut or weld tanks, drums or containers until the  
proper steps have been taken to insure that such procedures  
will not cause flammable or toxic vapors from substances  
inside. They can cause an explosion even though they have  
been “cleaned”. For information, purchase “Recommended  
Safe Practices for the Preparation for Welding and Cutting of  
Containers and Piping That Have Held Hazardous  
Substances”, AWS F4.1 from the American Welding Society  
(see address above).  
7.e. Keep your head and face away from the cylinder valve outlet  
when opening the cylinder valve.  
7.f. Valve protection caps should always be in place and hand  
tight except when the cylinder is in use or connected for  
use.  
7.g. Read and follow the instructions on compressed gas  
cylinders, associated equipment, and CGA publication P-l,  
“Precautions for Safe Handling of Compressed Gases in  
Cylinders,” available from the Compressed Gas Association  
1235 Jefferson Davis Highway, Arlington, VA 22202.  
6.e. Vent hollow castings or containers before heating, cutting or  
welding. They may explode.  
6.f. Sparks and spatter are thrown from the welding arc. Wear oil  
free protective garments such as leather gloves, heavy shirt,  
cuffless trousers, high shoes and a cap over your hair. Wear  
ear plugs when welding out of position or in confined places.  
Always wear safety glasses with side shields when in a  
welding area.  
FOR ELECTRICALLY  
powered equipment.  
6.g. Connect the work cable to the work as close to the welding  
area as practical. Work cables connected to the building  
framework or other locations away from the welding area  
increase the possibility of the welding current passing  
through lifting chains, crane cables or other alternate circuits.  
This can create fire hazards or overheat lifting chains or  
cables until they fail.  
8.a. Turn off input power using the disconnect  
switch at the fuse box before working on  
the equipment.  
8.b. Install equipment in accordance with the U.S. National  
Electrical Code, all local codes and the manufacturer’s  
recommendations.  
6.h. Also see item 1.c.  
8.c. Ground the equipment in accordance with the U.S. National  
Electrical Code and the manufacturer’s recommendations.  
Mar ‘95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iv  
iv  
SAFETY  
5. Toujours porter des lunettes de sécurité dans la zone de  
PRÉCAUTIONS DE SÛRETÉ  
soudage. Utiliser des lunettes avec écrans lateraux dans les  
zones où l’on pique le laitier.  
Pour votre propre protection lire et observer toutes les instructions  
et les précautions de sûreté specifiques qui parraissent dans ce  
manuel aussi bien que les précautions de sûreté générales suiv-  
antes:  
6. Eloigner les matériaux inflammables ou les recouvrir afin  
de prévenir tout risque d’incendie dû aux étincelles.  
7. Quand on ne soude pas, poser la pince à une endroit isolé  
de la masse. Un court-circuit accidental peut provoquer un  
échauffement et un risque d’incendie.  
Sûreté Pour Soudage A LArc  
1. Protegez-vous contre la secousse électrique:  
a. Les circuits à l’électrode et à la piéce sont sous tension  
quand la machine à souder est en marche. Eviter  
toujours tout contact entre les parties sous tension et  
la peau nue ou les vétements mouillés. Porter des  
gants secs et sans trous pour isoler les mains.  
b. Faire trés attention de bien s’isoler de la masse quand  
on soude dans des endroits humides, ou sur un  
plancher metallique ou des grilles metalliques,  
principalement dans les positions assis ou couché  
pour lesquelles une grande partie du corps peut être  
en contact avec la masse.  
8. S’assurer que la masse est connectée le plus prés possible  
de la zone de travail qu’il est pratique de le faire. Si on  
place la masse sur la charpente de la construction ou  
d’autres endroits éloignés de la zone de travail, on  
augmente le risque de voir passer le courant de soudage  
par les chaines de levage, câbles de grue, ou autres  
circuits. Cela peut provoquer des risques d’incendie ou  
d’echauffement des chaines et des câbles jusqu’à ce qu’ils  
se rompent.  
c. Maintenir le porte-électrode, la pince de masse, le  
câble de soudage et la machine à souder en bon et sûr  
état defonctionnement.  
9. Assurer une ventilation suffisante dans la zone de soudage.  
Ceci est particuliérement important pour le soudage de  
tôles galvanisées plombées, ou cadmiées ou tout autre  
métal qui produit des fumeés toxiques.  
d. Ne jamais plonger le porte-électrode dans l’eau pour  
le refroidir.  
e. Ne jamais toucher simultanément les parties sous  
tension des porte-électrodes connectés à deux  
machines à souder parce que la tension entre les deux  
pinces peut être le total de la tension à vide des deux  
machines.  
10. Ne pas souder en présence de vapeurs de chlore provenant  
d’opérations de dégraissage, nettoyage ou pistolage. La  
chaleur ou les rayons de l’arc peuvent réagir avec les  
vapeurs du solvant pour produire du phosgéne (gas  
fortement toxique) ou autres produits irritants.  
f. Si on utilise la machine à souder comme une source  
de courant pour soudage semi-automatique, ces  
precautions pour le porte-électrode s’applicuent aussi  
au pistolet de soudage.  
11. Pour obtenir de plus amples renseignements sur la sûreté,  
voir le code “Code for safety in welding and cutting” CSA  
Standard W 117.2-1974.  
2. Dans le cas de travail au dessus du niveau du sol, se protéger  
contre les chutes dans le cas ou on recoit un choc. Ne jamais  
enrouler le câble-électrode autour de n’importe quelle partie  
du corps.  
PRÉCAUTIONS DE SÛRETÉ POUR  
LES MACHINES À SOUDER À  
TRANSFORMATEUR ET À  
REDRESSEUR  
3. Un coup d’arc peut être plus sévère qu’un coup de soliel,  
donc:  
a. Utiliser un bon masque avec un verre filtrant approprié  
ainsi qu’un verre blanc afin de se protéger les yeux du ray-  
onnement de l’arc et des projections quand on soude ou  
quand on regarde l’arc.  
1. Relier à la terre le chassis du poste conformement au code de  
l’électricité et aux recommendations du fabricant. Le dispositif  
de montage ou la piece à souder doit être branché à une  
bonne mise à la terre.  
b. Porter des vêtements convenables afin de protéger la  
peau de soudeur et des aides contre le rayonnement de  
l‘arc.  
2. Autant que possible, I’installation et l’entretien du poste seront  
effectués par un électricien qualifié.  
c. Protéger l’autre personnel travaillant à proximité au  
soudage à l’aide d’écrans appropriés et non-inflammables.  
3. Avant de faires des travaux à l’interieur de poste, la debranch-  
er à l’interrupteur à la boite de fusibles.  
4. Des gouttes de laitier en fusion sont émises de l’arc de  
soudage. Se protéger avec des vêtements de protection libres  
de l’huile, tels que les gants en cuir, chemise épaisse, pan-  
talons sans revers, et chaussures montantes.  
4. Garder tous les couvercles et dispositifs de sûreté à leur  
place.  
Mar. ‘93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
MASTER TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR ALL SECTIONS  
Page  
i-iv  
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section A  
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Electrode Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Power Source Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
A-2  
A-4  
A-6  
A-8  
A-8  
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section B  
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Operator’s Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Controls and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Setup Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Starting and Stopping Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Setting Travel Starting and Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Voltage Control Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Automatic Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Cold Start Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Security of Weld Procedure Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
B-2  
B-2  
B-3  
B-4  
B-5  
B-6  
B-9  
B-10  
B-11  
B-12  
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section C  
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Listing of Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
C-2  
C-3  
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section D  
Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Welding Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
D-2  
D-3  
D-6  
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section E  
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Input Power Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Power and Voltage Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Control, Logic and Procedure Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
E-2  
E-2  
E-3  
E-4  
Optional start, Crater Fill and Weld Timer Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
SCR Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
E-5  
E-6  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section F  
Electrical Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section G  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vi  
vi  
NOTES  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section A  
Section A  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
- INSTALLATION SECTION -  
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section A  
Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Control Box Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Welding Head Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Input Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Control Box to Welding Head Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Power Supply to Control Box Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Electrode Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Power Source Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure A.8 — Connection of NA-5 (All) to a DC-600 . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure A.9 — Connection of NA-5 (All) to a DC-650 Pro . . . . . . .  
Figure A.10 — Connection of NA-5 (All) to a R3S-400, -600  
or -800 with no Line Voltage Compensator (Obsolete) . . . . . .  
Figure A.11 — Connection of NA-5 (All) to a SAM-400 Motor  
Generator or Engine Welder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure A.12 — Connection of NA-5 (All) to a SAM-650  
A-2  
A-4  
A-4  
A-4  
A-5  
A-6  
A-6  
A-6  
A-7  
A-8  
A-8  
A-9  
A-10  
A-11  
A-12  
Engine Welder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Figure A.13 — Connection of NA-5 to DC-1000 or DC-1500 . . . .  
Figure A.14 — Connection of NA-5 to DC-400 or CV-400 . . . . . .  
A-13  
A-14  
A-15  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-2  
A-2  
INSTALLATION  
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS – NA-5  
MINIMUM ELECTRICAL INPUT REQUIREMENTS  
115 VAC @ 3 amps 50/60 Hz power  
REQUIRED WELDING POWER SOURCE  
NA-5  
DC Constant Voltage  
WIRE FEED SPEED and GEAR RATIOS  
FEED SPEED RANGE  
in./min (m/min)  
MAX. WIRE SIZE in. (mm)  
GEAR RATIO  
CORED WIRE  
0.052 (1.3)  
3/32 (2.4)  
SOLID WIRE  
21:1  
57:1  
100 - 2070 (2.54 - 52.6)  
38 - 7.78 (0.96 - 19.8)  
22 - 456 (0.56 - 11.6)  
15 - 300 (0.38 - 7.62)  
0.052 (1.3)  
1/16 (1.6)  
1/8 (3.2)  
95:1  
5/32 (4.0)  
142:1  
5/32 (4.0)  
7/32 (5.6)  
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS  
LENGTH  
in. (mm)  
WIDTH  
in. (mm)  
HEIGHT  
in. (mm)  
WEIGHT  
lbs (kg)  
MODEL  
NA-5 Control Box  
9.02 (229)  
17.87 (454)  
15.05 (382)  
30 (13)  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-3  
A-3  
INSTALLATION  
FIGURE A.1 – BASIC CONTROL AND WIRE DRIVE SYSTEM.  
CONTROL BOX  
HEAD MOUNTING PARTS  
(WITH INSULATION  
AND HARDWARE)  
CONTROL  
CABLE  
TO  
POWER  
SOURCE  
WIRE  
STRAIGHTENER  
TACHOMETER  
CABLE  
4 FT (1.2 M) CABLE  
(DRIVE MOTOR TO  
CONTROL BOX)  
MOTOR  
4 FT (1.2 M) ELECTRODE CABLES  
[(TWO 4/0) CONTACT ASSEMBLY  
TO CONTROL BOX]  
CROSS  
SEAM  
ADJUSTER  
GEAR BOX  
CONTACT  
ASSEMBLY  
(OPTIONAL)  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-4  
A-4  
INSTALLATION  
1. Align the mounting holes in adapter  
plate M-13945 to the holes in the  
travel carriage.  
MECHANICAL  
INSTALLATION  
2. Install four hex head screws through  
the adapter plate and into the travel  
carriage.  
WARNING  
ELECTRIC SHOCK  
can kill.  
3. Secure the control box to the adapter  
plate with four lock washers and four  
bolts, two from the bottom and two  
from the back.  
• Turn off input power to  
the welding power source  
using the disconnect  
switch before working on  
this equipment.  
Before mounting the control box onto a  
fixture, you must provide mounting holes in  
the fixture per the measurements provided  
in Figure A.3 or dimension print S16717.  
When placing the mounting holes, ensure  
the controls and meters are convenient to  
the operator.  
INTRODUCTION  
This section covers the basic requirements to  
install the control box and welding head  
shown in Figure A.1. This section will give  
you mounting hole alignments, component  
mounting clearances, and any special  
instructions or precautions that must be fol-  
lowed when installing the control box and  
mounting head.  
FIGURE A.2 – CONTROL BOX  
CARRIAGE MOUNTING.  
CONTROL BOX INSTALLATION  
The control box can be mounted either on  
the standard travel carriage or on a separate  
fixture. It is electrically grounded by a lead  
in the input cable assembly.  
ADAPTER  
PLATE  
TRAVEL  
To install the control box on the standard  
travel carriage, use mounting kit T14469 and  
perform the following steps. Also refer to  
Figure A.2.  
CARRIAGE  
CONTROL  
BOX  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-5  
A-5  
INSTALLATION  
To install the control box on a fixture,  
perform the following steps and refer to  
Figure A.3.  
WELDING HEAD INSTALLATION  
The welding head can be mounted either  
with the standard head mounting hardware  
or with the horizontal head and/or vertical lift  
adjusters. Design the installation of your  
welding head so it meets the adjustability  
requirements of your welding application.  
Refer to Section C, Accessories, for more  
information regarding the adjustable  
mounting hardware.  
1. Align the mounting holes on the back  
and/or bottom of the control box with  
the holes you put in the fixture  
according to the measurements  
provided in Figure A.3.  
2. Secure the control box to the fixture  
using lock washers and hex head  
screws at each of the mounting holes.  
The welding head and electrode are  
electrically “hot” when welding. They must  
be insulated from ground.  
FIGURE A.3 – CONTROL BOX  
FIXTURE MOUNTING.  
Standard head mounting hardware and  
insulation are shipped with the NA-5  
welding head. If you are mounting the  
welding head on a separate fixture, provide  
the mounting holes for the standard head  
mount as specified in Figure A.4. For best  
arc striking, use a rigid mounting that  
prevents the head from moving when the  
electrode strikes the work.  
VIEW FROM BACK  
0.41  
(10.41)  
0.28 (7.11) SLOTS  
4 PLACES  
0.562 DIA (14.27)  
2 HOLES  
12.75  
(323.85)  
1.34  
(34.04)  
FIGURE A.4 – WELDING HEAD  
MOUNTING HOLES.  
13.77  
(349.76)  
1.71  
(43.43)  
12.00  
(304.8)  
APPROXIMATE  
INSULATOR  
0.531 DIA.  
(13.49)  
SIZE  
2.88  
(73.15)  
1.09  
(27.68)  
0.43  
(10.92)  
1/4-20  
THREAD HOLES  
2.62  
(66.55)  
4.265  
(108.33)  
VIEW FROM BOTTOM  
12.00  
(304.8)  
4.5  
1.71  
(43.43)  
(114.30)  
NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES  
WITH MILLIMETERS IN  
3.50  
(88.9)  
PARENTHESES.  
1/4-20 THREAD HOLES  
FRONT  
NOTE: DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES  
WITH MILLIMETERS IN  
PARENTHESES.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-6  
A-6  
INSTALLATION  
When mounting the welding head to the  
standard travel carriage, (see 305-B sec.  
T2.2.4) mount it so only a minimum of  
overhang weight exists. Mount the head so  
it stays within the dimension shown in Figure  
A.5.  
nection diagrams for connecting automatic  
welding systems to various welding power  
sources.  
INPUT POWER REQUIREMENTS  
350 volt-amperes of 115 VAC 50/60 Hz  
power is required for the wire feed motor and  
controls. Another 250 volt-amperes may be  
required depending on the travel circuit.  
FIGURE A.5 – MOUNT TO CARRIAGE  
OVERHANG DIMENSION.  
CONTROL BOX TO WELDING  
HEAD CONNECTIONS  
19 IN.  
(483 MM)  
All welding heads include a 4 ft (1.2 m)  
motor cable and motor tachometer cable.  
Insert the plugs on these cables into the  
matching receptacles on the side of the  
control box.  
If the 4 ft (1.2 m) cables are not sufficient,  
install a K335 or K338 control to head  
extension cable of the length ordered [up to  
30 ft (9.1 m)]. The K335, for the NA-5S  
head, includes motor, tachometer and flux  
hopper lead extensions with polarized plugs  
on each end, and electrode cables. The  
K338 for the NA-5N, NF, and SF heads is  
the same as the K335 without the flux  
hopper lead extension.  
The NA-5N and NA-5S also include two 4 ft  
(1.2 m) lengths of electrode cable. Bolt the  
terminals at one end of the the cable pair to  
the wire contact assembly and the terminals  
at the other end to the electrode leads on the  
power source to control cable assembly.  
Properly insulate the bolted connection.  
When the K335 or K338 extension cables are  
used between the controls and heads, the 4 ft  
(1.2 m) lengths of electrode cable are not  
used. If currents or duty cycles higher than  
1000 amps at 80% duty cycle will be used,  
add additional electrode cable per Table A.1.  
ELECTRICAL  
INSTALLATION  
WARNING  
ELECTRIC SHOCK  
can kill.  
• Do not touch electrically  
live parts such as output  
terminals or internal  
wiring.  
TABLE A.1  
80% Duty Cycle  
Below 1000 amps  
Two 4/0  
This section provides information on proper  
wiring procedures for the NA-5 welding sys-  
tem. This section also provides basic con-  
1000 to 1300 amps Three 4/0  
1300 to 1500 amps Four 4/0  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-7  
A-7  
INSTALLATION  
The “F” models do not include the 4 ft (1.2  
m) lengths of electrode cable as standard.  
If you are not using a K335 or K338 exten-  
sion cable for the NA-5NF or NA-5SF, order  
an appropriate length of the needed elec-  
trode cable. Connect it between the wire  
contact assembly and the control cable  
assembly as described above.  
Insert the polarized connector of the K215  
or K597* control cable into the matching  
receptacle on the side of the control box.  
With the power source off, connect the  
control cable assembly to the power  
source as follows:  
1. If using the multi-process power  
source (SAM, SA-800, SAF-600,  
DC-400, DC-600, DC-1000, or DC-  
1500 types), be sure it is properly set  
for the welding process being used  
per the connection diagram (Figures  
A.8 to A.14).  
POWER SUPPLY TO CONTROL  
BOX CONNECTIONS  
At the NA-5 control box, in order to activate  
the NA-5 weld current sensing switch, the  
electrode cables of the control cable  
assembly must be placed under the clamp  
bar on the left-hand side of the control box,  
as shown in Figure A.6. This is required  
for proper operation of the reed switch.  
The nuts holding the clamp bar in place  
need only to be pulled up snug. Do not  
overtighten. If a carriage is used, the  
electrode cables should also be clamped  
to it with the cable clamp supplied on the  
carriage. Do not clamp the control cable  
under the travel carriage clamp but route it  
over its top.  
2. Connect the K215 control cable  
leads to the power source terminal  
strip exactly as specified on the  
connection diagram.* Include all  
jumpers on the terminal strips as  
shown on the diagram. Do not put  
on any other jumpers. If currents or  
duty cycles higher than 1000 amps  
at 80% duty cycle will be used, add  
additional electrode cables to the  
K215 assembly per Table A.1.  
3 Depending on the power source and  
the process to be used, the jumpers  
on the NA-5 voltage board may have  
to be changed. As shipped, the  
NA-5 is connected for use with the  
DC-400, DC-600, DC-1000, and  
DC-1500 type power sources. For  
other power sources, refer to the  
appropriate connection diagram and  
to IM305 Sec. T3.6.  
FIGURE A.6 – CONTROL BOX  
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS.  
CLAMP  
BAR  
4. Connect work leads of sufficient size  
and length per Table A.1. between  
the “To Work” stud on the power  
source and the work. Be sure the  
connection to the work makes a tight  
and clean metal-to-metal contact.  
FROM  
POWER  
SOURCE  
*The K597 cable assembly has a 14-pin MS-type  
connector for use with later model Lincoln CV power  
sources.  
TO  
WELDING  
HEAD  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-8  
A-8  
INSTALLATION  
FIGURE A.7 – TERMINAL STRIP  
ELECTRODE POLARITY  
LOCATION.  
WARNING  
ELECTRIC SHOCK  
can kill.  
• Turn off input power to  
the welding power  
source  
using  
the  
disconnect  
switch  
before working on this  
equipment.  
TERMINAL  
STRIPS  
Polarity is changed at the power source.  
The polarity of the NA-5 control circuit is  
shipped connected for electrode positive. If  
electrode negative is required, two leads  
inside the NA-5 control must be reversed.  
Proceed as follows:  
POWER SOURCE  
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS  
1. Turn off the input power to the NA-5  
control box by turning off the welding  
power source.  
The following section contains the wiring  
diagrams necessary to connect the  
applicable power source to the control box.  
If there is no diagram, refer to power source  
manual.  
2. Open the control box door and locate  
the terminal strips on the back of the  
control box in the lower left-hand  
corner as shown in Figure A.7.  
WARNING  
3. On the right end of the lower terminal  
strip, interchange the black and white  
leads going to the terminals marked  
(+) and (-). The black lead (#67)  
must be connected to the same  
polarity as the electrode welding lead;  
i.e. if the electrode is positive,  
connect the black lead to the (+)  
terminal on the terminal strip. The  
white lead (#21) is connected to the  
opposite polarity terminal.  
ELECTRIC SHOCK  
can kill.  
• Turn off input power to  
the welding power  
source  
using  
the  
disconnect  
switch  
before working on this  
equipment.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-9  
A-9  
INSTALLATION  
FIGURE A.8 – CONNECTION OF NA-5 (ALL) TO A DC-600.  
P
TO NA-5 INPUT  
CABLE PLUG  
B
.A.  
NOTE:  
DIAGRAM SHOWS ELECTRODE CONNECTED POSITIVE.  
A
TO CHANGE POLARITY, TURN POWER OFF, REVERSE THE  
ELECTRODE AND WORK CABLES AT THE POWER SOURCE  
AND POSITON THE SWITCH ON POWER SOURCE TO PROPER  
POLARITY. REFER TO NA-5 OPERATING MANUAL FOR REQUIRED  
NA-5 CONTROL BOX POLARITY CONNECTIONS.  
P
CONNECT TO CABLES FROM NA-5  
WIRE CONTACT ASSEMBLY  
B
CONNECT  
TO WORK  
ALL CODES:  
TURN OFF INPUT POWER  
DC-600 CODES 8046-8200:  
FOR SUB ARC:  
ADJUST THE POWER SOURCE: DC-600:  
1. SET MODE SWITCH TO CV SUB ARC.  
2. WHITE LEAD ON CONTROL PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "M".  
1. CONNECT ELECTRODE CABLES TO TERMINAL OF DESIRED POLARITY.  
2. SET TOGGLE SWITCH TO SAME POLARITY AS THE ELECTRODE CABLE  
CONNECTION.  
FOR ALL OPEN ARC PROCESSES EXCEPT MR-203 ELECTRODES:  
1. SET MODE SWITCH TO CV INNERSHIELD.  
3. SET TOGGLE SWITCH TO "REMOTE".  
4. SET MODE SWITCH TO THE DESIRED POSITION FOR THE PROCESS TO BE USED.  
2. WHITE LEAD ON CONTROL PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "M".  
FOR NR-203 ELECTRODES:  
1. SET MODE SWITCH TO CV INNERSHIELD.  
2. WHITE LEAD ON CONTROL PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "I".  
DC-600 CODES 8000-8045:  
FOR SUB ARC:  
1. SET MODE SWITCH TO CV SUB ARC.  
2. WHITE LEAD ON CONTROL PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "M" AND BLUE  
LEAD IS CONNECTED TO "W".  
DC-600 CODES ABOVE 8200:  
FOR SUB ARC:  
1. SET MODE SWITCH TO CV SUB ARC.  
FOR ALL OPEN ARC PROCESSES:  
2. SET MODE SWITCH TO CV INNERSHIELD.  
FOR ALL OPEN ARC PROCESSES EXCEPT NR-302 AND NR-203 ELECTRODES:  
1. SET MODE SWITCH TO CV INNERSHIELD.  
2. WHITE LEAD ON CONTROL PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "M" AND BLUE  
LEAD IS CONNECTED TO "W".  
FOR OPTIMUM PERFORMANCE WITH NA-5, DC-600'S WITH CODES 8288 AND  
ABOVE ARE PREFERRED. FOR ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS,  
SEE NA-5 OPERATING MANUAL.  
FOR NR-203 AND NR-302 ELECTRODES:  
1. SET MODE SWITCH TO CV INNERSHIELD.  
2. WHITE LEAD ON CONTROL PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "I"  
AND BLUE LEAD IS CONNECTED TO "S".  
N.A. ON EARLIER DC-600'S, #67 TERMINAL WAS ALSO ON THE TERMINAL STRIP.  
N.B. WELDING CABLES MUST BE OF PROPER CAPACITY FOR THE CURRENT AND DUTY CYCLE OF IMMEDIATE AND FUTURE APPLICATIONS.  
N.C. EXTEND LEAD #21 USING #14 OR LARGER INSULATED WIRE PHYSICALLY SUITABLE FOR THE INSTALLATION. AN S-16586 - [ ] REMOTE VOLTAGE SENSING WORK  
LEAD IS AVAILABLE FOR THIS PURPOSE. CONNECT IT DIRECTLY TO THE WORK PIECE KEEPING IT SEPARATE FROM THE WELDING WORK CABLE CONNECTION  
TO THE WORK PIECE. FOR CONVENIENCE, THIS EXTENDED #21 LEAD SHOULD BE TAPED ALONG THE WELDING WORK CABLE.  
N.D. TAPE UP BOLTED CONNECTION.  
N.E. CONNECT THE NA-5 CONTROL CABLE GROUNDING LEAD TO THE FRAME TERMINAL MARKED  
SOURCE MUST BE PROPERLY GROUNDED.  
NEAR THE POWER SOURCE TERMINAL STRIP. THE POWER  
N.F. IF USING AN OLDER K-215 CONTROL CABLE: CONNECT LEAD #75 TO #75 ON TERMINAL STRIP, CONNECT LEAD #76 TO #76 ON TERMINAL STRIP, CONNECT  
LEAD #77 TO #77 ON TERMINAL STRIP.  
N.G. THE JUMPERS ON THE NA-5 VOLTAGE BOARD MUST BE CONNECTED AS FOLLOWS: CONNECT RED JUMPER TO PIN "S". CONNECT WHITE JUMPER TO PIN "B".  
N.H. CONNECT A JUMPER FROM "N" TO "P". THERE IS NO NPS TERMINAL STRIP ON DC-600 CODES ABOVE 8200.  
N.J. FOR PROPER NA-5 OPERATION, THE ELECTRODE CABLES MUST BE SNUGGED UNDER THE CLAMP BAR ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE NA-5 CONTROL BOX.  
CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-10  
A-10  
INSTALLATION  
FIGURE A.9 – CONNECTION OF NA-5 (ALL) TO A DC-650 PRO  
P
P
CONTROL  
CABLE  
TO NA-5 INPUT  
CABLE PLUG  
P
6
TO NA-5 INPUT  
CABLE PLUG  
A
CONNECT TO CABLES FROM  
NA-5 WIRE CONTACT ASSEMBLY  
A
CONNECT TO CABLES FROM NA-5  
WIRE CONTACT ASSEMBLY  
R
CONNECT  
TO WORK  
NOTE: ABOVE DIAGRAMS SHOW ELECTRODE CONNECTED POSITIVE. TO CHANGE POLARITY, TURN POWER OFF, REVERSE THE ELECTRODE  
AND WORK CABLES AT THE POWER SOURCE AND POSITION THE SWITCH ON THE POWER SOURCE TO PROPER POLARITY. REFER TO  
NA-5 OPERATING MANUAL FOR REQUIRED NA-5 CONTROL BOX POLARITY CONNECTIONS.  
DC650 PRO POWER SOURCE SETTINGS  
1. TURN OFF INPUT POWER.  
2. CONNECT ELECTRODE CABLES TO TERMINALS OF DESIRED POLARITY.  
3. SET TOGGLE SWITCH TO SAME POLARITY AS ELECTRODE CABLE CONNECTION.  
4. SET TOGGLE SWITCH TO REMOTE.  
5. SET MODE SWITCH TO DESIRED POSITION FOR THE PROCESS TO BE USED.  
6. CONNECT NEGATIVE OUTPUT CABLES TO MATCH MODE SWITCH SETTING.  
N.A. WELDING CABLES MUST BE SIZED FOR CURRENT AND DUTY CYCLE OF APPLICATION.  
N.B. EXTEND LEAD #21A BY REMOVING LEAD #21A FROM THE TERMINAL STRIP AND CONNECTING IT TO A #14 OR LARGER INSULATED WIRE PHYSICALLY SUITABLE FOR  
THE INSTALLATION.  
N.C. EXTEND LEAD #21 USING A #14 OR LARGER INSULATED WIRE PHYSICALLY SUITABLE FOR INSTALLATION.  
N.D. CONNECT EXTENDED LEAD DIRECTLY TO THE WORK PIECE KEEPING IT SEPARATE FROM THE WELDING WORK CABLE CONNECTION TO THE WORK PIECE. FOR  
CONVENIENCE, THIS EXTENDED LEAD SHOULD BE TAPED ALONG THE WELDING WORK CABLE.  
N.E. TAPE UP CONNECTION.  
N.F. FOR PROPER NA-5 OPERATION, THE ELECTRODE CABLES MUST BE SNUGGED UNDER THE CLAMP BAR ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE NA-5 CONTROL BOX.  
N.G. CONNECT NEGATIVE OUTPUT CABLES TO STUDS TO MATCH DC650 PRO MODE SWITCH SETTING.  
N.H. THE JUMPERS ON THE NA-5 VOLTAGE BOARD MUST BE CONNECTED AS FOLLOWS: CONNECT RED JUMPER TO PIN "S", CONNECT WHITE JUMPER TO PIN "B".  
N.J. IF USING AN OLDER K-215 CONTROL CABLE, CONNECT LEAD #75 TO #75 ON TERMINAL STRIP, CONNECT LEAD #76 TO #76 ON THE TERMINAL STRIP, CONNECT  
LEAD #77 TO #77 ON THE TERMINAL STRIP.  
N.K. CONNECT THE NA-5 CONTROL CABLE GROUNDING LEAD TO THE FRAME TERMINAL MARKED  
NEAR THE POWER SOURCE TERMINAL STRIP.  
CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-11  
A-11  
INSTALLATION  
FIGURE A.10 – CONNECTION OF NA-5 (ALL) TO A R3S-400, -600, OR -800  
WITH NO LINE VOLTAGE COMPENSATOR (OBSOLETE).  
B
B
B
POSITIVE  
NOTE: ABOVE DIAGRAM SHOWS ELECTRODE CONNECTED POSITIVE. TO CHANGE POLARITY, TURN POWER OFF, REVERSE THE ELECTRODE AND WORK CABLES AT THE  
POWER SOURCE AND POSITION THE SWITCH ON POWER SOURCE TO PROPER POLARITY. REFER TO NA-5 OPERATING MANUAL FOR REQUIRED NA-5 CONTROL  
BOX POLARITY CONNECTIONS.  
R3S POWER SOURCE SETTINGS  
TURN POWER SOURCE OFF.  
NA-5 SETTINGS  
FOR SUB ARC:  
1. RED LEAD ON VOLTAGE PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "S".  
2. WHITE LEAD ON VOLTAGE PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "A".  
FOR ALL PROCESSES:  
1. CONNECT ELECTRODE CABLE TO TERMINAL OF DESIRED POLARITY.  
2. SET THE POLARITY SWITCH TO THE SAME POLARITY AS THE ELECTRODE  
CABLE CONNECTION.  
3. SET TOGGLE SWITCH TO REMOTE.  
4. INSTALL VOLTAGE TRIANGLE IN A POSITION AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE TO  
THE DESIRED ARC VOLTAGE.  
FOR ALL OPEN ARC PROCESSES:  
1. RED LEAD ON VOLTAGE PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "F".  
2. WHITE LEAD ON VOLTAGE PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "A".  
FOR ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS, SEE NA-5 OPERATING MANUAL.  
N.A. ADD JUMPER FROM #75 TO #76, USING INSULATED COPPER WIRE.  
N.B. WELDING CABLES MUST BE OF PROPER CAPACITY FOR THE CURRENT AND DUTY CYCLE OF IMMEDIATE AND FUTURE APPLICATIONS.  
N.C. EXTEND LEAD #21 USING #14 OR LARGER INSULATED WIRE PHYSICALLY SUITABLE FOR THE INSTALLATION. AN S -16586 [ ] REMOTE VOLTAGE-SENSING WORK LEAD  
IS AVAILABLE FOR THIS PURPOSE. CONNECT IT DIRECTLY TO THE WORK PIECE, KEEPING IT SEPARATE FROM THE WELDING WORK CABLE CONNECTION TO THE  
WORK PIECE. FOR CONVENIENCE, THIS EXTENDED #21 LEAD SHOULD BE TAPED ALONG THE WELDING WORK CABLE.  
N.D. TAPE UP BOLTED CONNECTION.  
N.E. CONNECT THE NA-5 CONTROL CABLE GROUNDING LEAD TO THE FRAME TERMINAL MARKED  
MUST BE PROPERLY GROUNDED.  
, NEAR THE POWER SOURCE TERMINAL STRIP. THE POWER SOURCE  
N.F. IF USING AN OLDER K-215 CONTROL CABLE: CONNECT LEAD #75 TO #75 ON TERMINAL STRIP, CONNECT LEAD #76 TO #77 ON TERMINAL STRIP, CONNECT  
LEAD #77 TO #76 ON TERMINAL STRIP, AND ADD JUMPER PER N.A.  
N.G. ON EARLIER R3S MACHINES, #67 AND #1 TERMINALS WERE ALSO ON THE TERMINAL STRIP.  
N.H. THE UPPER TERMINAL STRIP (#75, #76, #77) WAS NOT PRESENT ON EARLY R3S MACHINES. THOSE MACHINES ARE NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THE NA-5 SINCE THERE  
CAN BE NO ADJUSTMENT OF VOLTAGE BY THE NA-5.  
N.J. FOR PROPER NA-5 OPERATION, THE ELECTRODE CABLES MUST BE SNUGGED UNDER THE CLAMP BAR ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE NA-5 CONTROL BOX.  
CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-12  
A-12  
INSTALLATION  
FIGURE A.11 – CONNECTION OF NA-5 (ALL) TO A SAM-400 MOTOR  
GENERATOR OR ENGINE WELDER.  
BOLT TO CABLES  
FROM NA-5  
P
WIRE CONTACT  
ASSEMBLY  
N.B.  
N.B.  
NOTE: TO CHANGE POLARITY, TURN POWER OFF, AND POSITION THE SWITCH ON POWER SOURCE TO PROPER POLARITY. REFER TO NA-5 OPERATING MANUAL FOR  
REQUIRED NA-5 CONTROL BOX POLARITY CONNECTIONS.  
SAM POWER SOURCE SETTINGS  
TURN POWER SOURCE OFF.  
NA-5 SETTINGS  
FOR SUB ARC:  
1. RED LEAD ON VOLTAGE PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "S".  
2. WHITE LEAD ON VOLTAGE PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "A".  
FOR SUB ARC:  
1. SET THE ELECTRODE POLARITY SWITCH TO THE VARIABLE VOLTAGE  
POSITION OF THE POLARITY DESIRED FOR THE PROCESS BEING USED.  
2. SET THE TOGGLE SWITCH TO CONSTANT VOLTAGE.  
3. SET THE CONSTANT VOLTAGE CONTROL TO NUMBER 7 AND THE  
CURRENT CONTROL TO 500.  
FOR ALL OPEN ARC PROCESSES:  
1. RED LEAD ON VOLTAGE PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "F".  
2. WHITE LEAD ON VOLTAGE PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "A".  
FOR ALL OPEN ARC PROCESSES:  
1. SET THE ELECTRODE POLARITY SWITCH TO THE CONSTANT VOLTAGE  
POSITION OF THE POLARITY DESIRED FOR THE PROCESS BEING USED.  
2. SET THE TOGGLE SWITCH TO CONSTANT VOLTAGE.  
3. SET THE CONSTANT VOLTAGE CONTROL TO NUMBER 5.  
FOR ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS, SEE NA-5 OPERATING MANUAL.  
N.A. REMOVE SAM PORTABLE FIELD CONTROL AND CONNECT NA-5 CONTROL CABLE.  
N.B. WELDING CABLES MUST BE OF PROPER CAPACITY FOR THE CURRENT AND DUTY CYCLE OF IMMEDIATE AND FUTURE APPLICATIONS.  
N.C. EXTEND LEAD #21 USING #14 OR LARGER INSULATED WIRE PHYSICALLY SUITABLE FOR THE INSTALLATION. AN S-16586-[ ] REMOTE VOLTAGE-SENSING WORK LEAD  
IS AVAILABLE FOR THIS PURPOSE. CONNECT IT DIRECTLY TO THE WORK PIECE, KEEPING IT SEPARATE FROM THE WELDING WORK CABLE CONNECTION TO  
WORK PIECE. FOR CONVENIENCE, THIS EXTENDED #21 LEAD SHOULD BE TAPED ALONG THE WELDING WORK CABLE.  
N.D. TAPE UP BOLTED CONNECTION.  
N.E. CONNECT THE NA-5 CONTROL CABLE GROUNDING LEAD TO THE FRAME TERMINAL MARKED  
MUST BE PROPERLY GROUNDED.  
, NEAR THE POWER SOURCE TERMINAL STRIP. THE POWER SOURCE  
N.F. IF USING AN OLDER K-215 CONTROL CABLE: CONNECT LEAD #76 TO #75 ON TERMINAL STRIP, CONNECT LEADS #75 AND #77 TO #76 ON TERMINAL STRIP.  
N.G. ON EARLIER SAM MACHINES, #1 TERMINAL WAS ALSO ON THE TERMINAL STRIP.  
N.H. FOR PROPER NA-5 OPERATION, THE ELECTRODE CABLES MUST BE SNUGGED UNDER THE CLAMP BAR ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE NA-5 CONTROL BOX.  
CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-13  
A-13  
INSTALLATION  
FIGURE A.12 – CONNECTION OF NA-5 (ALL) TO A SAM-650 ENGINE WELDER.  
POWER SOURCE  
TO NA-5 INPUT  
CABLE PLUG  
NOTE: TO CHANGE POLARITY, TURN POWER OFF, AND  
POSITION THE SWITCH ON POWER SOURCE TO  
PROPER POLARITY. REFER TO NA-5  
OPERATING MANUAL FOR REQUIRED  
NA-5 CONTROL BOX POLARITY CONNECTIONS.  
BOLT TO CABLES  
FROM NA-5  
"TAP"  
WIRE CONTACT  
ASSEMBLY  
P
P
P
. .  
NA-5 SETTINGS  
SAM POWER SOURCE SETTINGS  
TURN POWER SOURCE OFF.  
FOR SUB ARC:  
1. RED LEAD ON VOLTAGE PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "S".  
2. WHITE LEAD ON VOLTAGE PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "A".  
FOR SUB ARC:  
1. SET THE ELECTRODE POLARITY SWITCH TO THE POLARITY DESIRED FOR THE  
PROCESS BEING USED.  
2. SET THE TOGGLE SWITCH TO CONSTANT VOLTAGE.  
3. SET THE CONSTANT VOLTAGE CONTROL TO NUMBER 7.  
4. CONNECT THE TAP CABLE TO THE "300-575, MAX, SLOPE" STUD.  
FOR ALL OPEN ARC PROCESSES:  
1. RED LEAD ON VOLTAGE PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "F".  
2. WHITE LEAD ON VOLTAGE PC BOARD IS CONNECTED TO PIN "A".  
FOR ALL OPEN ARC PROCESSES:  
1. SET THE ELECTRODE POLARITY SWITCH TO THE POLARITY DESIRED FOR THE  
PROCESS BEING USED.  
2. SET THE TOGGLE SWITCH TO CONSTANT VOLTAGE.  
3. SET THE CONSTANT VOLTAGE CONTROL TO NUMBER 5.  
4. CONNECT THE TAP CABLE TO THE "450-MAX, MED SLOPE" STUD.  
FOR ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS, SEE NA-5 OPERATING MANUAL.  
N.A. REMOVE SAM PORTABLE FIELD CONTROL AND CONNECT NA-5 CONTROL CABLE.  
N.B. WELDING CABLES MUST BE OF PROPER CAPACITY FOR THE CURRENT AND DUTY CYCLE OF IMMEDIATE AND FUTURE APPLICATIONS.  
N.C. EXTEND LEAD #21 USING #14 OR LARGER INSULATED WIRE PHYSICALLY SUITABLE FOR THE INSTALLATION. AN S-16586- [ ] REMOTE VOLTAGE-SENSING WORK  
LEAD IS AVAILABLE FOR THIS PURPOSE. CONNECT IT DIRECTLY TO THE WORK PIECE, KEEPING IT SEPARATE FROM THE WELDING WORK CABLE CONNECTION  
TO THE WORK PIECE. FOR CONVENIENCE, THIS EXTENDED #21 LEAD SHOULD BE TAPED ALONG THE WELDING WORK CABLE.  
N.D. TAPE UP BOLTED CONNECTION.  
N.E. CONNECT THE NA-5 CONTROL CABLE GROUNDING LEAD TO THE FRAME TERMINAL MARKED  
SOURCE MUST BE PROPERLY GROUNDED.  
NEAR THE POWER SOURCE TERMINAL STRIP. THE POWER  
N.F. IF USING AN OLDER K-215 CONTROL CABLE: CONNECT LEAD #76 TO #75 ON TERMINAL STRIP, CONNECT LEADS #75 AND #77 TO #76 ON TERMINAL STRIP.  
N.G. ON EARLIER SAM MACHINES, #1 TERMINAL WAS ALSO ON THE TERMINAL STRIP.  
N.H. FOR PROPER NA-5 OPERATION, THE ELECTRODE CABLES MUST BE SNUGGED UNDER THE CLAMP BAR ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE NA-5 CONTROL BOX.  
CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-14  
A-14  
INSTALLATION  
FIGURE A.13 – CONNECTION OF NA-5 TO DC-1000 OR DC-1500.  
INPUT CABLE PLUG  
POWER SOURCE  
CONTROL  
CABLE  
P
BOLT TO CABLES FROM  
NA-5 WIRE CONTACT  
ASSEMBLY  
CONNECT TO WORK  
THE DIAGRAM SHOWS ELECTRODE CONNECTED POSITIVE. TO CHANGE POLARITY, TURN POWER OFF, REVERSE THE ELECTRODE AND WORK LEADS AT THE  
POWER SOURCE, POSITION THE POSITIVE-NEGATIVE SWITCH ON THE POWER SOURCE TO CORRESPOND TO THE POLARITY OF THE ELECTRODE CABLE CONNECTION.  
REFER TO NA-5 OPERATING MANUAL FOR REQUIRED NA-5 CONTROL BOX POLARITY CONNECTIONS.  
N.A. WELDING CABLES MUST BE OF PROPER CAPACITY FOR THE CURRENT AND DUTY CYCLE OF IMMEDIATE AND FUTURE APPLICATIONS.  
N.B. EXTEND LEAD 21 USING #14 OR LARGER INSULATED WIRE PHYSICALLY SUITABLE FOR THE INSTALLATION. AN S-16586-[ ] REMOTE VOLTAGE-SENSING WORK LEAD  
IS AVAILABLE FOR THIS PURPOSE. CONNECT IT DIRECTLY TO THE WORK PIECE KEEPING IT SEPARATE FROM THE WELDING WORK CABLE CONNECTION TO  
WORK PIECE. FOR CONVENIENCE, THIS EXTENDED #21 LEAD SHOULD BE TAPED ALONG THE WELDING WORK CABLE.  
N.C. TAPE UP BOLTED CONNECTION.  
N.D. CONNECT THE NA-5 CONTROL CABLE GROUND LEAD TO THE FRAME TERMINAL MARKED  
MUST BE PROPERLY GROUNDED.  
NEAR THE POWER SOURCE TERMINAL STRIP. THE POWER SOURCE  
N.E. IF USING AN OLDER AUTOMATIC CONTROL CABLE WITH LEADS 75, 76, 77; CONNECT LEAD 75 TO #75 ON TERMINAL STRIP, CONNECT LEAD #76 TO #74 ON TERMINAL  
STRIP, CONNECT LEAD #77 TO #73 ON TERMINAL STRIP.  
N.F. CONNECT THE JUMPERS ON THE NA-5 VOLTAGE BOARD AS FOLLOWS: CONNECT RED JUMPER TO PIN "S". CONNECT WHITE JUMPER TO PIN "B".  
N.G. SET THE DC-1000 OR DC-1500 CONTROLS AS FOLLOWS: SET THE CONTROL SWITCH TO "OUTPUT CONTROL REMOTE".  
FOR SUBMERGED ARC PROCESSES, SET THE MODE SWITCH TO "C.V. SUBMERGED ARC". FOR OPEN ARC PROCESSES, SET THE MODE  
SWITCH TO "C.V. INNERSHIELD"  
N.H. FOR PROPER OPERATION, THE ELECTRODE CABLE MUST BE SNUGGED UNDER THE CLAMP BAR ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE NA-5 CONTROL BOX.  
N.J. TERMINALS #73 AND #74 WERE NOT PRESENT ON DC-1500 MACHINES BELOW CODE 8294. THESE EARLIER CODE MACHINES ARE NOT SUITABLE FOR  
USE WITH THE NA-5.  
N.K. ALTERNATIVE 500 AMP POSITIVE TERMINAL CONNECTION PROVIDED ON DC-1000 MODELS ABOVE CODE 9500 ONLY.  
N.L. ALTERNATE SUBMERGED ARC MODE AVAILABLE FOR IMPROVED ARC STABILITY IN HIGH CURRENT, LARGE PUDDLE, SLOW TRAVEL PROCEDURES BY MAKING  
SPECIAL CONNECTIONS ON BOTH DC-1500 AND NA-5.  
ON DC-1500 CONTROL BOARD (G-1530-2 AND SUPERSEDING) REMOVE RED AND BLUE JUMPERS FROM "FR" PINS AND RECONNECT TO CORRESPONDING "SR" PINS.  
ON NA-5 VOLTAGE BOARD (G-1556-1 AND SUPERSEDING) WHITE JUMPER MUST BE CONNECTED TO PIN "D".  
NA-5 PIN "D" CONNECTION MAY ALSO BE USED FOR SOME PROCEDURES ON DC-1500 WITHOUT CONTROL BOARD JUMPERS, DC-1500 WITH CONTROL BOARD  
JUMPERS ON "FR" PINS OR DC-1000.  
CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-15  
A-15  
INSTALLATION  
FIGURE A.14 – CONNECTION OF NA-5 TO DC-400 OR CV-400.  
POWER SOURCE  
TO NA-5 INPUT CABLE PLUG  
C
B
N.E.  
A
CONTROL  
CABLE  
32  
31  
2
N.H.  
N.D. AND N.H.  
4
GND  
21  
POSITIVE  
NEGATIVE  
N.D.  
N.B. AND N.C.  
BOLT TO CABLES FROM NA-5  
WIRE CONTACT ASSEMBLY  
N.A.  
CONNECT TO WORK  
THE DIAGRAM SHOWS ELECTRODE CONNECTED POSITIVE. TO CHANGE POLARITY, TURN POWER OFF, REVERSE THE ELECTRODE AND WORK LEADS AT THE  
POWER SOURCE AND POSITION THE SWITCH ON POWER SOURCE (IF EQUIPPED), TO PROPER POLARITY. REFER TO NA-5 OPERATING MANUAL FOR REQUIRED  
NA-5 CONTROL BOX POLARITY CONNECTIONS. ALSO REFER TO NOTE N.H.  
FOR ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS, SEE NA-5 OPERATING MANUAL.  
N.A. WELDING CABLES MUST BE OF PROPER CAPACITY FOR THE CURRENT AND DUTY CYCLE OF IMMEDIATE AND FUTURE APPLICATIONS.  
N.B. EXTEND LEAD #21 USING #14 AWG OR LARGER INSULATED WIRE PHYSICALLY SUITABLE FOR THE INSTALLATION. AN S-16586- [LENGTH] REMOTE  
VOLTAGE-SENSING WORK LEAD IS AVAILABLE FOR THIS PURPOSE. CONNECT IT DIRECTLY TO THE WORK PIECE KEEPING IT ELECTRICALLY SEPARATE  
FROM THE WELDING WORK LEAD CIRCUIT AND CONNECTION. FOR CONVENIENCE, THIS EXTENDED #21 LEAD SHOULD BE TAPED TO THE WELDING  
WORK LEAD. (IF THE LENGTH OF WORK LEAD CIRCUIT IS SHORT, AND CONNECTIONS CAN BE EXPECTED TO BE RELIABLE, THEN CONTROL CABLE  
LEAD #21 DOES NOT NEED TO BE EXTENDED AND CAN BE DIRECTLY CONNECTED TO TERMINAL #21 ON THE TERMINAL STRIP. NOTE THAT THIS IS  
NOT THE PREFERRED CONNECTION BECAUSE IT ADDS ERROR TO THE NA-5 VOLTMETER READING.)  
N.C. TAPE UP BOLTED CONNECTION.  
N.D. CONNECT THE CONTROL CABLE GROUND LEAD TO THE FRAME TERMINAL MARKED  
NEAR THE POWER SOURCE TERMINAL STRIP. THE POWER  
SOURCE GROUNDING TERMINAL (MARKED AND LOCATED NEAR THE POWER SOURCE INPUT POWER CONNECTIONS) MUST BE PROPERLY CONNECTED  
TO ELECTRICAL GROUND PER THE POWER SOURCE OPERATING MANUAL. .  
N.E. THE JUMPERS ON THE NA-5 VOLTAGE BOARD MUST BE CONNECTED AS FOLLOWS: CONNECT RED JUMPER TO PIN "S". CONNECT WHITE JUMPER TO PIN "B".  
WHEN USING NA-5 CONTROLS ABOVE CODE 8300 WITHOUT THE OPTIONAL DC-400 DIODE KIT OR CV-400, CVI-500 DIODE OPTIONS:  
THE NA-5 INCH DOWN BUTTON WILL NOT OPERATE UNLESS A JUMPER IS CONNECTED BETWEEN THE TWO TAB TERMINALS, LABELED "AUTO",  
LOCATED ABOVE THE TRANSFORMER ON THE NA-5 VOLTAGE PC BOARD. THIS JUMPER, HOWEVER, WILL DISABLE THE COLD STARTING/AUTO STOP  
FEATURE OF THE NA-5, PERMITTING ONLY HOT STARTING TECHNIQUES TO BE USED.  
N.G. FOR PROPER NA-5 OPERATION, THE ELECTRODE CABLES MUST BE SNUGGED UNDER THE CLAMP BAR ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE NA-5 CONTROL BOX.  
N.H.* IF LEAD #21 IS TO BE CONNECTED TO THE TERMINAL STRIP, CONNECT TO THE #21 TERMINAL THAT MATCHES WORK POLARITY. THIS CONNECTION MUST  
BE CHANGED WHENEVERTHE ELECTRODE POLARITY IS CHANGED.  
* DOES NOT APPLY TO DC-400 BELOW CODE 9200 WITH POLARITY SWITCH.  
CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A-16  
A-16  
NOTES  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section B  
Section B  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
- OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS SECTION -  
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section B  
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Operator’s Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Controls and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Exposed Controls (With Lockable Cover Down) . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Controls Under the Lockable Security Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Setup Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Starting and Stopping Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Means of Arc Striking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Setting Travel Starting and Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Starting Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Stopping Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Reconfiguring the Travel Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Voltage Control Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Automatic Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Cold Start Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Security of Weld Procedure Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
B-2  
B-2  
B-3  
B-3  
B-3  
B-4  
B-5  
B-5  
B-6  
B-6  
B-6  
B-6  
B-9  
B-10  
B-11  
B-12  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-2  
B-2  
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS  
1. Be sure there is enough electrode in  
the machine to complete the weld.  
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS  
2. If submerged arc welding, fill flux  
hopper with new or freshly screened  
flux. All reused flux must be screened  
100% through an 8 mesh screen  
[0.065 to 0.075 in. (1.6 to 1.9 mm)  
opening]. Turn the switch on the  
hopper to “On.”  
WARNING  
ELECTRIC SHOCK  
can kill.  
• Do not touch electrical-  
ly live parts or elec-  
trode with skin or wet  
clothing.  
3. Start the power source.  
4. Turn the “Power Control” switch on the  
wire feeder control to “On.”  
• Insulate yourself from  
work or ground.  
• Always wear dry insu-  
lating gloves.  
5. Position the welding head at the start  
of the weld. Be sure the travel carriage  
or other travel mechanism is set to  
move in the proper direction.  
FUMES AND GASES  
can be dangerous.  
6. Set the travel switch to “Automatic  
Travel.” When set to “Hand Travel”,  
the travel system operates without  
welding.  
Keep your head out of  
fumes.  
Use ventilation or  
exhaust to remove  
fumes from breathing  
zone.  
7. For best starts, cut the electrode to a  
sharp point.  
8. Press the “Inch Down” button to feed  
the electrode out of the nozzle.  
WELDING SPARKS  
can cause fire or  
explosion.  
a. For most applications, when hot  
starting, leave the electrode  
1/4 in. (6.4 mm) or more away  
from the work.  
• Keep flammable mater-  
ial away.  
b. When cold starting some  
submerged arc welding, inch the  
electrode down until it touches the  
work and the flux valve opens.  
• Do not weld on con-  
tainers that have held  
combustibles.  
ARC RAYS  
can burn.  
9. Press the “Start” button.  
10. While welding, turn the cross seam  
adjuster handwheel as needed to keep  
the arc in the joint.  
Wear eye, ear, and  
body protection.  
11. At the end of the weld, press the  
“Stop” button.  
Observe additional Safety Guidelines  
detailed in the beginning of this manual.  
12. If needed, press the “Inch Up” button  
to get the electrode up and out of the  
way. Remove the work and reload the  
fixture.  
OPERATOR’S  
INSTRUCTIONS  
NOTE: When the contact tip in the end of the  
nozzle wears during repetitive welding, it  
must be replaced. Check the contact tip for  
wear if weld quality seems to be  
deteriorating.  
Once the system is properly set up, the  
operator can make production welds  
without readjusting the controls using the  
following simple instructions:  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-3  
B-3  
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS  
4. INCH UP AND INCH DOWN. Press to  
CONTROLS AND  
THEIR FUNCTIONS  
inch electrode up or down.  
5. MODE SELECTOR SWITCH AND  
LIGHTS. Used to preset the voltage  
and wire feed speed for the various  
modes of operation (Strike, Start,  
Weld, and Crater).  
The operator controls for the NA-5 are  
illustrated in Figure B.1. Refer to the figure  
and the following explanations of the  
controls.  
EXPOSED CONTROLS (WITH  
LOCKABLE COVER DOWN)  
6. SET-ACTUAL BUTTON. When  
pressed, will display the actual wire  
speed and voltage in the wire speed  
and volts meters. When the button is  
not pressed, the set wire speed and  
voltage is displayed.  
1. CIRCUIT BREAKER. Protects the  
circuit from severe wire feed motor  
overloads and short circuits. Press to  
reset.  
7. START. Begins welding cycle.  
2. CONTROL POWER. Turns input  
control power “On” and “Off.” Also  
used as an emergency “Off” in case  
of malfunction.  
8. STOP. Initiates the stopping cycle at  
the end of the weld.  
9. TRAVEL. Turn to “Off” for no travel,  
“Hand Travel” for travel without  
welding, and “Automatic Welding” for  
welding operations.  
3. ELECTRODE  
HOT”  
LIGHT.  
Comes on when the “Start button” is  
pressed and the electrode circuit  
becomes electrically hot.  
10. VOLTS METER. Displays the set or  
actual voltage for each mode (Strike,  
Start, Weld, Crater).  
FIGURE B.1 – NA-5 CONTROLS.  
11. WIRE SPEED METER. Displays the  
set or actual wire speed for each  
mode (Strike, Start, Weld, Crater).  
CONTROLS UNDER THE  
LOCKABLE SECURITY COVER  
12. ARC STRIKING CONTROLS. Sets  
the wire speed until the welding  
current begins to flow and controls  
the power source voltage during arc  
striking.  
11  
10  
15  
17  
13. BURNBACK AND ELECTRODE  
BACKUP TIME. Controls the length  
of burnback delay time after the stop  
circuit is energized.  
16  
12  
14. WELD CONTROLS. Controls the  
voltage and wire speed during the  
welding mode.  
13  
7
15. CRATER CONTROLS (OPTIONAL).  
Sets the ending current and voltage  
for an adjustable period of time.  
3
16. START CONTROLS (OPTIONAL).  
Sets the starting current and voltage  
for an adjustable period of time.  
1
6
4
14  
9
8
17. WELD TIME (OPTIONAL). Controls  
2
5
the time of the weld mode.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-4  
B-4  
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS  
5. Set the head position relative to the  
work as required for the fixture,  
application, and procedures. See  
IM305 Sec. T3.2.3.  
SETUP INSTRUCTIONS  
Use the following steps to set up the NA-5  
welding system prior to welding:  
1. If using a multi-process power source  
(SAM, DC-400, DC-600, DC-1000,  
OR DC-1500 type), make con-  
nections and settings per the power  
source connection diagram (Figures  
A.8 to A.14) for the process being  
used.  
6. Rotate the wire straightener, if used,  
until the top of the straightener faces  
the wire reel. This is required for  
smooth feeding of the electrode into  
the straightener.  
7. Refer to the instructions for the wire  
contact assembly being used. See  
IM305 Sec. T2.2.6, T2.2.7, T2.5.3, or  
T2.5.4.  
AUTO TAB  
When using the NA-5 with the DC-  
400 or CV-400 power source, the  
auto tab jumper on the NA-5 voltage  
PC board must be connected in order  
for the inch down circuit to function.  
When the auto tab jumper is  
connected, the cold starting feature  
of the NA-5 is disabled and only the  
hot starting technique can be used. If  
the cold start technique is to be used,  
the optional Diode must be installed  
on the DC-400 or CV-400.  
8. The mount for standard 50 and 60 lb  
(22.7 and 27.2 kg) electrode coils  
includes  
a
two-position brake  
assembly. Generally the brake should  
be at the inner position (nearest to  
the wire reel shaft) for wire feed  
speeds below 400 in./min (10 m/min).  
It should be at the outer position for  
faster wire speeds. To adjust the  
brake position, remove the wire reel.  
Pull the cotter pin that holds the  
brake shoe to the arm, move the  
shoe, and replace the cotter pin. Do  
not bend the cotter pin — it is held in  
place by a friction fit.  
2. Set the power source and NA-5  
circuit polarity per information on  
Electrode Polarity in Section A,  
Installation.  
3. Depending on the procedures and  
applications, decide:  
9. Load the wire reel per IM305 Sec.  
T3.2.2 or install the Speed-Feed  
drum or reel per Sec. T2.5.7-A or -B.  
a. The means of arc striking and  
whether to start the travel with  
the “Start” button or the arc.  
10. Straighten the first 6 in. (152.4 mm)  
of electrode and push it through the  
wire straightener to the drive rolls. To  
use the cored wire straightener,  
remove the knurled nut at the top and  
feed the wire through the nut, down  
through the straightener, and into the  
drive rolls. Screw the nut back onto  
the straightener. Feed the wire  
through the nozzle tip and adjust  
the straightener for optimum  
straightness. With wire contact  
assemblies, except the K231, adjust  
until the electrode is straight as it  
comes out of the nozzle. Do not  
completely straighten the wire when  
using the K231 contact nozzle  
because the nozzle relies on the  
small curvature of the electode for  
proper electrical contact within the  
contact tip.  
b. Whether the initial bead size or  
penetration requires use of the  
optional “Start Controls.”  
See the Starting and Stopping  
Sequences section.  
4. Depending upon the procedures and  
applications:  
a. Select the arc and travel stopping  
sequence. See the Starting and  
Stopping Sequences section.  
b. Decide if the control of the ending  
bead size or crater fill requires  
the use of optional “Crater  
Controls”. See the Starting and  
Stopping Sequences section.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-5  
B-5  
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS  
11. Set the travel speed as specified by  
STARTING AND STOPPING  
SEQUENCES  
the procedures. With the wire feeder  
travel switch set to “Hand Travel”, the  
travel runs without welding, permitting  
accurate measurement of travel  
speed. When using a Lincoln travel  
carriage, adjust the speed with the  
rheostat and the direction with the  
toggle switch on the carriage control  
panel.  
MEANS OF ARC STRIKING  
The NA-5 Codes utilize “hot start” arc  
striking which operates as follows:  
1. With the electrode not touching the  
work, press the “Start” button.  
12. Connect the work lead to the work or  
a suitable piece of scrap. Clip the  
end of the electrode to a sharp point.  
2. The electrically “hot” electrode  
inches down as set by the “Inch Wire  
Speed” control.  
13. Preset the “Start” (if used), “Weld”,  
and “Crater” (if used) controls to the  
wire speed and voltage specified in  
the procedure.  
3. When the electrode makes contact  
with the work, the arc strikes and the  
circuit automatically switches from  
“Strike” settings to “Weld” (or “Start”,  
if used) settings.  
14. Make several test welds, readjusting  
the controls in the following order:  
NA-5 models above Code 8300 offer both  
“hot start” arc striking, as described  
above, or “Cold Start” arc striking which  
operates as follows:  
a. Set the “Arc Striking”, “Inch Wire  
Speed”, and “Volts” controls for  
optimum arc striking.  
The  
optimum strike control settings for  
most processes will be typically 4  
to 5 volts higher than the weld  
mode voltage setting and 40% to  
50% of the weld mode wire feed  
speed setting (possibly lower if  
cold starting is used).  
1. Press the “Inch Down” button until the  
tip of the electrode touches the work,  
automatically stops, and the flux (if  
used) is automatically dispensed.  
NOTE: If inch speed is set too high, the  
electrode may stop with too much force on  
its tip, resulting in possible poor starting.  
b. If striking is still not satisfactory,  
refer to the section on Setting  
Travel Starting and Stopping or  
IM305 Sec. T3.5.2 for information  
on wire feed motor acceleration.  
2. The arc establishes when the “Start”  
button is pressed, and the circuit  
automatically switches to “Weld” (or  
“Start”, is used) settings. Should the  
arc not start immediately, the wire will  
retract slightly until the arc is  
established and then feed down in the  
normal manner.  
c. If installed, adjust the “Start  
Controls” to set the welding  
procedures for the time set on the  
timer to provide the bead size,  
penetration, or other factor as  
needed for the application.  
Use either the standard “on-the-fly” travel  
starting or rewire the controls for “standstill”  
travel starting as described in the Setting  
Travel Starting and Stopping section.  
d. If installed, adjust the “Crater  
Controls” to set the welding  
procedures for the set time after  
the “Stop” button is pressed to  
provide the bead size or fill the  
crater as needed for the  
application.  
Optional “Start Controls”  
Recommended for applications where  
penetration, bead size, and other  
characteristics must be carefully controlled  
at the start.  
e. Set the “Burnback  
Time” to  
provide the stopping char-  
acteristics needed.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-6  
B-6  
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS  
The starting sequence is as described above  
except that when the arc strikes, the  
machine welds at the wire speed and  
voltage set by the “Start Controls” panel until  
the time set on the thumbwheel switch  
elapses. The circuit then automatically  
switches to the “Welding Controls” wire  
speed and voltage. Actual settings depend  
on application requirements.  
3. Any application for improved arc  
striking.  
“Standstill” Travel Starting  
All models can be reconnected so the travel  
remains at a standstill until the arc starts.  
“Standstill” travel starting is used when the  
electrode must be started at a precise  
location.  
Available options for applications with  
particularly difficult starting.  
For consistent arc striking with “Standstill”  
travel starting, always clip the end of the  
electrode to a sharp point before starting.  
1. K238 High Frequency Generator -  
See IM305 Sec. T2.5.8.  
STOPPING SEQUENCES  
SETTING TRAVEL  
STARTING AND STOPPING  
As shipped, the travel stops when the “Stop”  
button is pressed, producing a small crater  
area.  
Standard machines can be connected for a  
variety of starting and stopping sequences.  
When the end of the weld overlaps the  
beginning, changing the stopping sequence  
to stop the travel later spreads the crater  
over a longer area.  
STARTING SEQUENCES  
“On-the-Fly” Travel Starting  
RECONFIGURING THE TRAVEL  
SEQUENCES  
When shipped, all models are connected for  
“On-the-Fly” travel starting. The starting  
sequence is as follows:  
WARNING  
1. With the electrode NOT touching the  
work, press the “Start” button. This  
starts both the wire feed and travel  
motors.  
ELECTRIC SHOCK  
can kill.  
• Turn off input power to  
the welding power source  
using the disconnect  
switch before working on  
this equipment.  
2. When the electrically “hot” electrode  
touches the work to start the arc,  
there is relative motion between the  
end of the electrode and the work.  
This “scratching” type contact helps  
assure consistent arc striking.  
To change the travel sequence, turn off all  
input power to the NA-5 control box. Open  
the control box. The logic board is mounted  
on the back of the box in the upper right  
hand corner. To change the travel circuit for  
the various modes of starting and stopping,  
follow the information in the wiring diagram  
for the NA-5 being used. Table B.1 also  
shows information on reconfiguring the  
travel sequences.  
This sequence is recommended for most  
welding applications including:  
1. Roundabouts and any other weld  
which ends at its starting point. A  
K337 Weld Timer Module to control  
the welding cycle duration can be  
installed.  
2. Welds started on a run-out tab.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-7  
B-7  
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS  
TABLE B.1 – TRAVEL SEQUENCE LEAD AND SWITCH POSITIONS.  
Travel Starts  
Travel Stops  
Older Models  
Newer Models*  
With “Start”  
Button  
With “Stop”  
Button  
Lead #691 to Pin 6  
Lead #692 to Pin 5  
1
1
1
2
3
4
4
4
1
1
1
2
3
4
4
4
Switch #1  
Switch #2  
With Arc Striking With Arc Stopping  
With Arc Striking With Stop Button  
Lead #691 to Pin 6  
Lead #692 to Pin 7  
2
3
2
3
Switch #1  
Switch #2  
Lead #691 to Pin 5  
Lead #692 to Pin 7  
2
3
2
3
Switch #1  
Switch #2  
With “Start”  
Button  
With End Crater  
Fill Time (With  
optional procedure  
module installed in  
Lead #691 to Pin 6  
Lead #692 to Pin 9  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Switch #1  
Switch #2  
1
crater receptacle )  
With “Start”  
Button  
After Burnback  
Time (with  
Lead #691 to Pin 6  
Lead #692 to Pin 8  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
optional procedure  
module installed  
in crater  
Switch #1  
Switch #2  
1
receptacle )  
1
*NOTE:  
If the optional procedure module is installed in the crater receptacle,  
DIP switch position 1 on switch #2 should be in the UP position as  
shown. Additionally, remove 583C to 584C jumper plug from the pro  
cedure board. If the procedure module is not installed, the switch  
should be in the down position and the 583C to 584C jumper plug  
should be reinstalled on the procedure board.  
Indicates switch in up position  
Indicates switch in down position  
Indicates switch position does not matter  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-8  
B-8  
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS  
Wire Feed Motor Acceleration  
The standard stopping sequence when the  
optional “Crater Controls” are not used is as  
follows:  
WARNING  
1. Press the “Stop” button.  
ELECTRIC SHOCK  
can kill.  
2. The wire feed motor stops and the  
“Burnback Time Delay” starts.  
• Turn off input power to  
3. The arc continues to burn the  
electrode back from the puddle until  
the arc goes out or the time set on the  
thumbwheel switch elapses. This  
control should be set for just enough  
burnback time to prevent crater  
sticking.  
the welding power source  
using the disconnect  
switch before working on  
this equipment.  
The NA-5 has two different speeds of  
controlled wire feed motor acceleration. As  
shipped, the unit is connected for fast  
acceleration which is best for most  
applications. To change to the slower  
acceleration, turn off all input power to the  
NA-5 control box. Open the control box.  
Locate the Control PC Board mounted on  
the back of the box in the lower right hand  
corner. Change the jumper plug from the “F”  
pin to the “S” pin as shown in Figure B.2.  
There are two other ways this circuit can be  
connected. One will cause the wire to  
retract* with a contactor drop out delay at  
the end of the weld. The second will cause  
the wire to retract* during burnback time,  
and there will be no contactor drop out delay  
at the end of the weld. If either one of these  
alternate methods of stopping the weld is  
desired, the connections on the logic board  
can be easily changed.  
FIGURE B.2 – ACCELERATION  
JUMPER PLUGS.  
To change the stopping sequence, turn the  
input AC power off at the power source,  
remove the screw holding the inner panel,  
and swing the panel open. Change the  
connections (older models) or switch  
positions (newer models) on the logic board  
as shown in Table B.2.  
JUMPER  
PLUG  
Optional “Crater Controls”  
This option is recommended for applications  
where the ending bead size must be  
controlled, applications when the crater must  
be filled, roundabouts, and any other welds  
where the end overlaps the start.  
When the “Stop” button is pressed, the  
machine welds at the wire speed and  
voltage set by the “Crater Controls” until the  
time set on the thumbwheel switch elapses.  
The circuit then automatically switches to the  
arc stopping sequence described above.  
NOTE: Setting crater time to 0.00 seconds  
will give zero crater time; however, the  
crater settings will be active during  
burnback time until the arc goes out.  
Burnback and Electrode Backup  
The primary consideration in setting the arc  
stopping sequence is to prevent the  
electrode from sticking in the puddle. This  
is easily done with the machine as shipped.  
*Wire will retract at weld mode speed (or crater mode  
speed, if installed) until the arc goes out and then retract  
at strike mode speed for the remainder of burnback  
time.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-9  
B-9  
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS  
TABLE B.2 – STOPPING SEQUENCE SETTINGS.  
When “Stop” Button  
is Pressed  
Older Models  
Newer Models*  
1
2
3
4
Feed motor stops and  
electrode burns back with  
contactor delay (standard)  
Lead #693 to Pin 3  
Lead #690 to Pin 4  
Switch #2  
1
2
3
4
Feed motor inches up and  
electrode burns back with  
contactor delay  
Lead #693 to Pin 1  
Lead #690 to Pin 4  
Switch #2  
Feed motor inches up and  
contactor opens  
Lead #693 to Pin 1  
Lead #690 to Pin 2  
1
2
3
4
(no burnback)  
Switch #2  
*NOTE:  
Indicates switch in up position  
Indicates switch in down position  
Indicates switch position does not matter  
FIGURE B.3 – VOLTAGE CONTROL  
RESPONSE JUMPER PLUG  
LOCATIONS.  
VOLTAGE CONTROL  
RESPONSE  
The NA-5 is provided with selectable voltage  
control response. Proper setting depends on  
the power source and process being used.  
Refer to the appropriate power source  
connection diagram for the proper  
connection of the jumpers located on the  
NA-5 Voltage P.C. Board, shown in Figure  
B.3.  
RED  
JUMPER  
PLUG  
To change the voltage control response:  
1. Turn off all input power to the NA-5  
control.  
WHITE  
JUMPER  
PLUG  
2. Open the control box.  
3. Locate the Voltage P.C. Board  
mounted on the right side of the box.  
Position the jumper plugs on the  
Voltage P.C. Board per the  
appropriate power source connection  
diagram.  
B
D
A
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-10  
B-10  
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS  
likely to occur when using the R3S models  
with the somewhat limited voltage ranges of  
the various taps. For instance, if the R3S-  
400 triangle tap setting is for 31 volts, the  
range of control from the remote circuit is  
approximately 7 volts, i.e. 27.5 to 34.5 volts  
at nominal input voltage. If the NA-5  
controls are set for 29 volts, and the input  
voltage to the R3S goes up, it may not be  
possible for the NA-5 control circuit to hold  
the 29 volts, so the welding will shut down.  
By changing to the 27 volt triangle setting,  
the range will be approximately 23.5 to 30.5  
volts, and at high input voltage, there will be  
sufficient control to hold the “Set” arc  
voltage. On these machines, if the NA-5  
stops welding, follow this procedure:  
AUTOMATIC SHUTDOWN  
If the NA-5 voltage control is unable to  
supply the “Set” value of the arc voltage  
while welding, the automatic shutdown  
circuit will activate. This protection circuit  
immediately returns the NA-5 control to idle  
state within a few seconds after the arc  
voltage discrepancy occurs.  
Typical causes that activate this protective  
shutdown circuit are as follows:  
1. “Set” value of arc voltage is outside  
the power source range.  
2. Power source voltage control not set  
for “Remote”.  
1. Move the NA-5 voltage set point 2  
volts lower than the desired  
procedure and make a test weld.  
3. Misconnection of NA-5 control cable  
leads to the power source.  
4. Incorrect weld polarity connections, or  
settings, at NA-5 or power source.  
a. If the NA-5 still shuts down, go to  
step 2 below.  
5. Lost connection of NA-5 voltage  
sensing leads (#67 and #21) between  
arc and voltage control or a blown 1/8  
amp fuse on voltage PC boards built  
since 1983.  
b. If the NA-5 keeps welding,  
change the R3S triangle setting  
to the next higher voltage and  
reset the NA-5 set point to the  
desired procedure. The R3S is  
now set properly unless there is  
a significant change in input  
voltage. Skip the following step.  
With NA-5 units above Code 8300, the  
conditions of causes 4 and 5 above would  
result in the wrong wire feed direction when  
the weld is started. See the section on Cold  
Start Circuitry.  
2. Move the NA-5 voltage setting set  
point 2 volts higher than the desired  
procedure and make a test weld.  
In the case of full-range control power  
sources, such as the DC-600, this protective  
shutdown circuit could prevent welding  
under the conditions of causes 3, 4 and 5  
above by holding the power output at  
minimum, possibly providing too low of a  
power source output to even establish an  
arc, or causing the field fuse to blow  
because of rapid field reversals with NA-5  
controls above Code 8300. See the section  
on Cold Start Circuitry.  
a. If the NA-5 keeps welding,  
change the R3S triangle setting  
to the next lower voltage and  
reset the NA-5 set point to the  
desired procedure. The R3S is  
now set properly unless there is  
a significant change in input  
voltage. Skip the following step.  
b. If the NA-5 still shuts down, refer  
to the following paragraph and  
other causes previously listed.  
Although out of range shutdown can occur  
with all power sources when working with  
very low or very high arc voltages, it is most  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-11  
B-11  
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS  
In some cases, it is also possible to hold the  
A. Auto Stop  
“Actual” button pressed while starting the  
arc. Before the NA-5 shuts down, the actual  
arc voltage can be read on the digital meter.  
Comparing this reading to the “Set” reading  
will tell what change in the range controls of  
the power source are required so it can  
supply the desired voltage. Should the  
meter read zero, check the NA-5 sensing  
leads (#21 and #67) connections. Should  
the meter read negative (-) voltage, the  
polarity connections or settings at the NA-5  
or power source are wrong.  
When the “Inch Down” button is pressed, a  
low-level DC voltage signal is applied  
between the electrode and work which  
permits the wire to inch down normally.  
When the electrode makes electrical contact  
with the work, it shorts out this signal  
causing the wire feed to automatically stop  
and the flux solenoid to activate until the  
“Inch Down” button is released. The “Inch  
Up” button is not affected by this circuit.  
B. Electrode Backup  
This same general procedure can be used  
on the other power sources. For example,  
if the NA-5 keeps shutting down and the  
other possible causes have been checked,  
adjust the “Set” voltage higher and/or lower  
than the desired voltage. If the NA-5  
continues to weld at one of these voltages,  
it can be determined what change in the  
range controls of the power source are  
required so it can supply the desired voltage.  
If while starting or welding the electrode  
stubs or shorts to work, the resulting loss of  
arc voltage will cause the electrode to  
momentarily back up until the arc voltage is  
re-established and then change back to the  
normal feed direction.  
NOTE: The “cold starting” circuitry will  
cause the NA-5 to feed in the wrong  
direction when the “Start” button is pressed  
if the “Actual” arc voltage, as read on the  
NA-5 voltmeter, does not exceed typically  
about 6.5 volts. Usual causes for the  
situation are:  
COLD START CIRCUITRY  
NA-5 controls above Code 8300 contain  
circuitry added to the voltage PC board to  
facilitate the “cold starting” features of these  
units.* This circuitry senses the voltage  
present between the electrode and work, via  
leads #67 and #21, and permits normal wire  
feed if this voltage exceeds approximately  
6.5 VDC. However, if this voltage level is  
not exceeded, or drops below approximately  
3.5 VDC, the “Auto Stop” activates while  
inching down or electrode backup occurs if  
the arc start circuit has been initiated.  
1. No wire loaded through the NA-5  
head and nozzle assembly (except  
when using the K148 Contact  
Nozzle).  
2. No power source weld cable  
connection to the NA-5 head or work.  
3. Incorrect  
electrode  
polarity  
connections at the NA-5 or power  
source.  
*Units below Code 8300 can be provided with the cold  
start circuitry by replacing the old L-6257 voltage board  
with the new G-1556 voltage board. This new board  
will mount and connect in the same manner as the old  
board, except the third harness connector (previously  
connected to a jumper plug) must be connected to the  
lower receptacle of the new voltage board.  
4. Little or no output voltage from the  
power source.  
5. An open voltage sensing lead #67 or  
#21 to the NA-5 control box or a  
blown 1/8 amp fuse on a voltage PC  
board built since 1983.  
NOTE: HI-FREQ starting cannot be used  
with converted units below Code 8300.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B-12  
B-12  
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS  
beneath each square so the head  
is on the back side of the panel  
(inside the control box).  
SECURITY OF WELD  
PROCEDURE SETTINGS  
f. Remount the PC board assembly  
and its panel insulation.  
Reconnect the PC board and  
close and secure the control box.  
There are two means provided to prevent or  
limit unauthorized readjustment of the NA-5  
voltage and wire feed speed controls once  
set to the desired procedure.  
g. Remount the rotary select switch  
knob and replace each square  
spacer tube and felt seal so the  
#4 screw protrudes between the  
tube and the felt seal.  
1. The security panel of the NA-5 can be  
locked to prevent access to the  
control knobs.  
2. The control range of the procedure  
control knobs can be limited to either  
about 3% or about 15% of the full  
range control by installing a knob  
rotation stop screw to any or all of the  
control knobs. This stop screw is  
installed in the following manner:  
h. Turn on the NA-5 input power and  
set the desired procedure by  
rotating the shafts of the controls.  
i. Carefully replace each control  
knob so the #4 screw inserts into  
the center of the shorter length  
channel on the back of the knob  
for about 3% of the total range of  
control or into the center of the  
longer length channel for about  
15% of the total range of control.  
a. Turn off the input power to the  
NA-5.  
b. Loosen each knob set screw and  
remove all knobs, including the  
rotary select switch knob.  
c. Remove the felt seal and square  
spacer tube mounted behind  
each control knob.  
j. With finger pressure on the knob  
against the felt seal, carefully  
retighten the set screw of each  
knob.  
d. Open  
the  
control  
box.  
Disconnect, then remove, the  
procedure control PC board  
assembly and its panel insulation.  
NOTE: Steps h thru j will have to be  
repeated if it is desired to change the  
procedure settings to values outside the  
selected 3% or 15% control range limit.  
e. Install a 1/2 in. long, pan or round  
head, #4 sheet metal screw into  
the 0.10 in. diameter hole located  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section C  
Section C  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
- ACCESSORIES SECTION -  
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section C  
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Listing of Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
K29 Vertical Lift Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
K58 Magnetic Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
K96 Horizontal Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
C-2  
C-3  
C-3  
C-3  
C-3  
C-3  
®
K129 Submerged Arc Small Wire Twinarc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
TM  
K148 Contact Nozzle and K149 Linc-Fill  
Long Stickout Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
K218 Horizontal Fillet/Lap Attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
K219 Flux Hopper Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
K223 Solenoid Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
K225 Submerged Arc Twinarc Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
K238 High Frequency Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
C-3  
C-3  
C-3  
C-3  
C-4  
C-4  
C-4  
C-4  
C-4  
C-4  
C-4  
C-4  
C-5  
C-5  
C-5  
C-5  
C-5  
C-5  
C-5  
®
K239 Twinarc Kit for Innershield Electrodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
TM  
K278 Spreadarc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
K281 Solid Wire Straightener for Tiny Twinarc . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
K285 Concentric Flux Cone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
K310 Flux Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
K325 TC-3 Travel Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
K334 Start and Crater Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
K336 Remote Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
K337 Weld Timer Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
K349 Multi-Procedure Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
S-22022 or S-22182 Current Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Speed-Feed Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Speed-Feed Reel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-2  
C-2  
ACCESSORIES  
GENERAL  
This section contains a listing and short  
description of the accessories that are  
available with the NA-5 automatic welding  
system.  
TABLE C.1 – NA-5 AUTOMATIC WELDING SYSTEM ACCESSORIES.  
Product Number  
Product Name  
K29  
VERTICAL LIFT ADJUSTER  
MAGNETIC SEPARATOR  
HORIZONTAL ADJUSTER  
SUBMERGED ARC SMALL WIRE TWINARC  
CONTACT NOZZLE  
K58  
K96  
K129  
K148  
K149  
K218  
K219  
K223  
K225  
K238  
K239  
K278  
K281  
K285  
K310  
K325  
K334  
K336  
K337  
K349  
S22022 or S22182  
LINC-FILL LONG STICKOUT EXTENSION  
HORIZONTAL FILLET/LAP ATTACHMENT  
FLUX HOPPER KIT  
SOLENOID KIT  
SUBMERGED ARC TWINARC KIT  
HIGH FREQUENCY UNIT  
TWINARC KIT FOR INNERSHIELD ELECTRODES  
SPREADARC  
SOLID WIRE STRAIGHTENER FOR TINY TWINARC  
CONCENTRIC FLUX CONE  
FLUX SCREEN  
TC-3 TRAVEL CARRIAGE  
START AND CRATER CONTROLS  
REMOTE INTERFACE MODULE  
WELD TIMER MODULE  
MULTI-PROCEDURE KIT  
CURRENT RELAY  
SPEED-FEED DRUMS  
SPEED-FEED REELS  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-3  
C-3  
ACCESSORIES  
K148 CONTACT NOZZLE AND  
K149 LINC-FILLTM LONG  
STICKOUT EXTENSION  
LISTING OF ACCESSORIES  
K29 VERTICAL LIFT ADJUSTER  
When mounted in the NA-5 head mounting  
system, the K29 Vertical Lift Adjuster  
provides quick hand crank adjustment of the  
vertical head position. It also has some  
horizontal adjustability as described in Sec.  
T3.2.3 of operator’s manual IM305.  
Installation instructions are shipped with  
each K29 Vertical Lift Adjuster kit, are  
contained in the IM305 manual, and can be  
ordered as Sec. T2.2.11.  
This Innershield and submerged arc nozzle  
is designed for 0.062 through 3/16 in.  
(1.57 through 4.76 mm) wire at high  
currents. When long stickout [2 to 5 (50.80  
to 127.00 mm)] is required, the K149  
Linc-Fill Long Stickout Extension is  
recommended along with the K237 Linc-Fill  
Starting Relay. Instructions are contained in  
the IM305 manual and can also be ordered  
as Sec. T2.2.7.  
K58 MAGNETIC SEPARATOR  
K218 HORIZONTAL  
FILLET/LAP ATTACHMENT  
Useful with any submerged arc equipment.  
The unit removes foreign magnetic particles  
from reused submerged arc welding flux.  
Operating instructions are included with the  
kit.  
This special contact assembly automatically  
guides the electrode when making  
submerged arc horizontal fillet and lap welds  
to ensure accurate bead placement without  
expensive fixtures and clamps. Installation,  
operating, and maintenance instructions are  
shipped with each kit, are contained in the  
IM305 manual, and can also be ordered as  
Sec. T2.5.4.  
K96 HORIZONTAL ADJUSTER  
When mounted in the NA-5 head mounting  
system, the K96 Horizontal Adjuster  
provides quick hand crank adjustment of the  
horizontal head position. Installation  
instructions are shipped with each K96  
Horizontal Adjuster kit, are contained in the  
IM305 manual, and can be ordered as Sec.  
T2.2.12.  
K219 FLUX HOPPER KIT  
This flux hopper, which has an electric flux  
valve, can be mounted on NA-5N and  
NA-5NF heads for submerged arc welding.  
Installation instructions are included with  
each kit. The operator and maintenance  
instructions are contained in the IM305  
manual and can also be ordered as  
Sec. T2.5.9.  
K129 SUBMERGED ARC SMALL  
WIRE TWINARC®  
The Twinarc system provides for the feeding  
of two small solid wires through a single wire  
feeder. The Twinarc assembly includes a  
wire reel, reel brake, shaft and mounting  
bracket, drive roll, idle roll assembly, dual  
wire guides, and nozzle and contact tip or  
contact tip holder. Instructions are shipped  
with each kit, are contained in the IM305  
manual, and can be ordered as Sec. T2.5.3  
K129.  
K223 SOLENOID KIT  
The solenoid kit includes a valve to control  
water flow when using the cooling  
attachment on the K148 or K239 contact  
nozzle assembly. It opens when the start  
button is pressed and can be wired to close  
either when the stop button is pressed or  
when the arc goes out. Installation  
instructions are shipped with each kit.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-4  
C-4  
ACCESSORIES  
arc, and submerged arc procedures can be  
used. Instructions are shipped with the kit,  
are contained in the IM305 manual, and can  
also be ordered as Sec. T2.5.6.  
K225 SUBMERGED  
ARC TWINARC KIT  
The Twinarc kit provides for the feeding of  
two 5/64, 3/32, or 1/8 in. (1.98, 2.38, or  
3.18 mm) solid wires through a single wire  
feeder. The electrode wire must be the  
same size. The assembly includes a wire  
reel, insulated reel mounting bracket, wire  
straightener, dual wire guides, nozzle, and  
contact block. Installation, operating, and  
maintenance instructions are shipped with  
each kit, are contained in the IM305 manual,  
and can be ordered as Sec. T2.5.3 K225.  
K281 SOLID WIRE  
STRAIGHTENER FOR  
TINY TWINARC  
This wire straightener will straighten 0.045  
through 3/32 in. (1.14 through 2.38 mm) wire  
diameters. It is recommended for welding  
procedures requiring long stickout and  
where wire position accuracy is essential.  
Instructions are shipped with the kit, are  
contained in the IM305 manual, and can be  
ordered as Sec. T2.5.5.  
K238 HIGH FREQUENCY UNIT  
This unit supplies high frequency to the  
welding leads for more positive starts, which  
may be required for certain difficult starting  
applications. Factory-installed insulation is  
required. Instructions are shipped with each  
unit. Installation instructions are contained  
in the IM305 manual and can be ordered as  
Sec. T2.5.8.  
K285 CONCENTRIC FLUX CONE  
The concentric flux cone was designed to  
fit on the K148 Contact Nozzle alone, the  
K148 Contact Nozzle with a K149 Linc-Fill  
Long Stickout Extension, the K129  
Submerged Arc Small Wire Twinarc, and  
the K391 nozzles. (The maximum electrical  
stickout when using the K149 Linc-Fill Long  
Stickout Extension will be 4 in. [101.6 mm.]).  
Use of this attachment results in the flux  
being fed concentrically around the  
K239 TWINARC KIT FOR  
INNERSHIELD® ELECTRODES  
This kit provides for welding with two  
Innershield electrodes. Two 3/32 in.  
(2.38 mm) flux-cored electrodes are fed  
through a single wire feeder. Both wires  
must be the same size. The K239 kit  
includes the nozzle equipped for water  
cooling, drive rolls, drive roll locating collar,  
idle roll assembly, ingoing and outgoing  
guide tubes, wire straightener, wire reel, and  
wire reel mounting shaft and insulation.  
Instructions are included in the kit, are  
contained in the IM305 manual, and can  
also be ordered as Sec. T2.5.3 K239.  
electrodes.  
Installation, operating, and  
maintenance instructions are shipped with  
each kit, are contained in the IM305 manual,  
and can be ordered as Sec. T2.2.8 K285.  
K310 FLUX SCREEN  
Useful for any submerged arc equipment. It  
removes foreign magnetic particles from  
reused submerged arc welding flux.  
Operating instructions are included in the kit.  
K278 SPREADARCTM  
K325 TC-3 TRAVEL CARRIAGE  
The primary application for this accessory is  
for hardfacing buildup using a Twinarc  
nozzle. The combination “Spreadarc-  
Twinarc” covers large areas quickly with  
smooth beads of minimum admixture with  
the base metal. Flux cored electrode, open  
The K325 Travel Carriage carries the control  
box and wire drive head, in either direction,  
on a beam of suitable length and  
mechanical specifications. Two models are  
available: Standard and High Capacity.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-5  
C-5  
S22022 OR S22182 CURRENT  
ACCESSORIES  
K334 START AND CRATER  
CONTROLS  
RELAY MODULES  
Easily installed procedure and timer boards  
to permit adjustment of wire speed and  
voltage. Can be installed to function at  
either the start of the weld or at the end for  
crater filling. Installation, operating, and  
maintenance instructions are shipped with  
each kit and can be ordered as Sec. T2.5.13  
K334.  
The current relay is useful to fixture builders  
and others who need a signal indicating that  
welding current is flowing. Installation,  
operating, and maintenance instructions are  
shipped with each kit. The S22022 relay  
module is suitable for dry circuit applications  
and it is rated at 2 Amps, 115 VAC or 28  
VDC. This relay has both normally open and  
normally closed contacts. The S22182 relay  
module is suitable for applications requiring  
at least 10 mA current and it is rated at 3  
Amps, 115 VAC or 28 VDC. This relay only  
has normally open contacts.  
K336 REMOTE INTERFACE  
MODULE  
Permits connection of customer-furnished  
remote start-stop and inch momentary  
contact closure or momentary 24 volt  
signals. Also used when a single remote  
signal is desired to start or stop multiple  
heads. This module replaces the earlier  
K336 Remote Pushbutton Interface Module.  
Installation and application instructions are  
shipped with each kit and can be ordered as  
Sec. T2.5.11 K336.  
SPEED-FEED DRUM  
These drums must be set on a turntable  
which permits them to freely turn in a  
clockwise direction. Installation, operating,  
and maintenance instructions are contained  
in the IM305 manual and can be ordered as  
Sec. T2.5.7-A.  
SPEED-FEED REEL  
K337 WELD TIMER MODULE  
These reels require dereeling equipment  
that permits the reel to rotate freely as the  
electrode is used. Installation, operating,  
and maintenance instructions are contained  
in the IM305 manual and can be ordered as  
Sec. T2.5.7-B.  
Permits setting of weld time for an adjustable  
period. Eliminates need to press the “Stop”  
button. Instructions are included in the kit.  
K349 MULTI-PROCEDURE KIT  
The K349 Multi-Procedure Kit provides three  
additional weld mode procedure settings of  
wire feed speed and voltage, allowing the  
choice of four NA-5 weld mode procedures.  
Installation, operating, and maintenance  
instructions are shipped with each kit, are  
contained in the IM305 manual, and can be  
ordered as Sec. T2.5.19 K349.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C-6  
C-6  
NOTES  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section D  
Section D  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
- MAINTENANCE SECTION -  
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section D  
Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Circuit Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Ground Fault Fuse Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Welding Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Wire Drive Gear Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Wire Drive Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Changing Wire Feed Gear Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Wire Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Wire Straighteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Contact Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Wire Reel Mounting for 50 or 60 lb (22.7 or 27.2 kg) Coils . . . . .  
Travel Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Vertical Lift Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Horizontal Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
High Frequency Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Spreadarc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
D-2  
D-2  
D-2  
D-3  
D-3  
D-3  
D-4  
D-4  
D-5  
D-5  
D-6  
D-6  
D-6  
D-6  
D-6  
D-6  
D-6  
D-6  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-2  
D-2  
MAINTENANCE  
If a complete or partial short occurs in the  
field circuit, or if there is a defect on the PC  
board, a 1/2 amp slow-blow type fuse will  
blow. This field circuit fuse is mounted on the  
power PC board, shown in Figure D.2, inside  
the control box. Before replacing the fuse,  
check the motor field for a short condition.  
Normal resistance is approximately 700  
ohms.  
CONTROL BOX  
GENERAL  
Inspect the control box every 3 months. If  
needed, blow dirt out using low pressure air.  
No further maintenance should be required.  
CIRCUIT PROTECTION  
With NA-5 controls above Code 8300, the  
field circuit fuse may blow due to frequent  
motor field reversals from application  
problems affecting the “cold” starting circuit,  
such as the power source output being too  
low to establish an arc or the welding  
procedure causing frequent electrode-to-  
puddle shorting. (Refer to Automatic  
Shutdown in Section B, Operating  
Instructions.)  
The circuit breaker mounted on the left side  
of the control box protects the control circuit  
from short circuit conditions and from severe  
wire feed overloads. If it is open, determine  
and correct the cause for the overload. To  
reset the circuit breaker, push in the red  
button shown in Figure D.1.  
FIGURE D.1 – CIRCUIT BREAKER  
RESET BUTTON.  
FIGURE D.2 – POWER PC BOARD  
FUSE LOCATIONS.  
NA-5 POWER  
FIELD  
1/2 AMP  
SLOW-BLOW  
FUSE  
POWER  
1/2 AMP  
SLOW-BLOW  
FUSE  
The power supply for the electronic circuitry  
is protected by a 1/2 amp slow-blow type fuse  
shown in Figure D.2. It is located on the  
power PC board inside the control box.  
CIRCUIT  
BREAKER  
RESET BUTTON  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-3  
D-3  
MAINTENANCE  
The 1/8 amp fast-blow fuse, shown in Figure  
D.3, on a voltage PC board built since 1983,  
protects the NA-5 circuitry from damage  
which may result from a ground or case  
faulted control lead. If the fuse blows, the  
NA-5 voltage sensing lead circuit will be  
opened (Refer to Automatic Shutdown in  
Section B, Operating Procedures) and the  
Troubleshooting Guide.  
NA-5 circuit common (#510). Such a  
condition typically exists when the NA-5  
polarity connections are set for electrode  
negative.  
WELDING HEAD  
WIRE DRIVE GEAR BOX  
Once a year, recoat all gear teeth with a  
non-fluid molydisulfide type grease such as  
Non-Fluid Oil Corporation’s A-29 Special/MS  
Lubricant. For access to the gears in the first  
chamber, remove the adapter plate and  
motor assembly as shown in Figure D.4.  
FIGURE D.3 – VOLTAGE BOARD FUSE  
LOCATION.  
1/8 AMP  
FAST-BLOW  
FUSE  
FIGURE D.4 – WIRE DRIVE MOTOR  
GEAR BOX.  
DRIVE MOTOR  
BRUSH ACCESS  
HEX HEAD  
SCREW  
ADAPTER  
PLATE AND  
MOTOR  
ASSEMBLY  
FIRST  
CHAMBER  
PIPE  
PLUG  
WIRE DRIVE  
GEARBOX  
SECOND  
CHAMBER  
GROUND FAULT FUSE  
PROTECTION  
SLOT HEAD  
SCREW  
To lubricate the gears in the second  
chamber, remove one of the pipe plugs and  
feed grease until it comes in contact with the  
bevel gear teeth. Then, rotate the output  
shaft by hand until all teeth are lubricated.  
A 1/8 amp fast-blow fuse, shown in Figure  
D.3, is located on the voltage PC board.  
This fuse will protect the NA-5 circuitry from  
damage resulting from a ground or case  
faulted control lead when the arc voltage  
potential exists between ground and the  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-4  
D-4  
MAINTENANCE  
FIGURE D.5 – CHANGING THE WIRE  
WIRE DRIVE MOTOR  
FEED GEAR RATIO  
Periodically inspect the wire drive motor  
brushes, Figure D.4. Replace the brushes  
as needed.  
HEX NUT (11)  
PLAIN WASHER (9)  
CHANGING WIRE FEED GEAR  
RATIOS  
INPUT  
HELICAL  
GEAR (12)  
SLOT HEAD  
SCREWS  
(MOUNTING  
SCREWS)  
WIRE  
FEED  
Four wire size conversion kits are available  
to modify the wire feeder for different size or  
type electrodes. The kits include drive rolls  
and guide tubes for the wire specified, as  
shown in Table D.1.  
GEARBOX  
TABLE D.1 - CONVERSION KITS  
WOODRUFF  
KEY (8)  
Wire Type in. (mm)  
Conversion Kit  
3/32-7/32 (2.38-5.56)  
Solid or Cored  
T13724-A  
1/16-3/32 (1.59-2.38)  
Solid or Cored  
T13724-B  
T13724-C  
T13724-D  
0.035-0.052 (0.89-1.32)  
Solid  
1. Remove the four screws that mount  
the adapter plate and motor assembly  
to the gear box. Remove the adapter  
plate and motor assembly from the  
gear box.  
0.045-0.052 (1.14-1.32)  
Cored  
Refer to Table D.2. Four gear ratios are  
available: 21:1, 57:1, 95:1, and 142:1. To  
change the gear ratio, replace the motor  
pinion and the first reduction gear per the  
following instructions (Refer to Figures D.4,  
D.5 and D.6).  
2. Take the two long screws removed in  
step 1 and screw one into each of the  
tapped holes located on the face of  
fiber input helical gear (12). Insert the  
screws through the full thickness of  
the gear, and using a screwdriver  
wedged between the screws to  
prevent rotation, remove hex nut (11)  
that holds the gear to the shaft.  
Remove plain washer (9).  
NOTE: Any item numbers in parentheses  
on Figure D.5 refer to item numbers in the  
task description breakdown.  
TABLE D.2 – WIRE FEED GEAR RATIOS.  
Feed Speed  
Max Wire Size  
in. (mm)  
Gear  
Range  
Ratio  
in/min (m/min)  
Cored Wire  
Solid Wire  
0.052 (1.3)  
1/16 (1.6)  
1/8 (3.2)  
21:1  
57:1  
100-2070 (2.54-52.58)  
40-778 (1.02-19.76)  
22-456 (0.56-11.58)  
15-300 (0.38-7.62)  
0.052 (1.3)  
3/32 (3.0)  
5/32 (4.0)  
5/32 (4.0)  
95:1  
142:1  
7/32 (5.6)  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-5  
D-5  
MAINTENANCE  
3. Pull the gear from the shaft using the  
screws as a pulling device.  
FIGURE D.6 – DRIVE MOTOR PINION  
GEAR REMOVAL.  
4. Be certain woodruff key (8) is properly  
located on the shaft. Screw the  
adapter plate and motor assembly  
mounting screws into the new fiber  
input helical gear from the stenciled  
side and place the gear on the shaft.  
Replace plain washer (9), tighten the  
hex nut (1), and remove the adapter  
plate and motor assembly mounting  
screws from the gear.  
WIRE  
DRIVE  
MOTOR  
SHAFT  
5. After noting the relation of the adapter  
plate with the motor leads, remove  
the adapter plate from the wire drive  
motor. See Figure D.6. Support the  
pinion properly and, with the proper  
size punch, drive the roll pin that  
holds the pinion out of the shaft. Pull  
the pinion off. Install the new pinion  
and replace the roll pin. Replace the  
adapter plate in its original location.  
ADAPTOR  
PLATE  
PINION  
MOUNTING  
SCREW (X3)  
ROLL PIN  
6. Cover the teeth of the motor pinion  
and the input gear with a non-fluid  
molydisulfide type grease such as  
Non-Fluid Oil Corporation’s A-29  
Special/MS Lubricant. This grease  
can be scooped from the cavity of the  
gear case.  
The electrode is driven by gripping  
between the grooved drive rolls and  
spring-loaded idle roll. Replace the drive  
rolls when they become worn. The drive rolls  
for 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) and larger diameter  
electrodes have two sets of teeth so they  
can be reversed once before they must be  
replaced.  
7. Reassemble the motor on the gear  
box; make sure the gears mesh  
properly and the adapter plate  
locating bead is in its cavity. Replace  
and tighten the four screws removed  
in step 1.  
WIRE STRAIGHTENERS  
Solid Electrode  
8. Jumper on wire speed meter PC  
board must be properly positioned for  
the gear ratio and drive rolls being  
used (See the wiring diagram for the  
wire speed meter PC board.)  
Periodically inspect the slide bushing at the  
top of the straightener and the ingoing wire  
guide at the bottom of the straightener for  
signs of wire milling. If necessary, rotate the  
guide to present an unworn surface. To  
reverse the slide bushing for a fresh wear  
surface, remove the cross adjustment screw  
and turn the bushing over.  
WIRE DRIVE MECHANISM  
Drive mechanisms for three wire size ranges  
are available: 0.035 through 0.052 in.  
(0.9 through 1.3 mm), 1/16 through 3/32 in.  
1.6 through 2.4 mm), and 3/32 through  
7/32 in. (2.4 through 5.6 mm). If changing to  
wire sizes outside this range, change the  
drive rolls and the incoming and outgoing  
guide tubes. Also change the gear ratio as  
necessary.  
Flux-Cored Electrode  
Severe wear at the “V” groove in the curved  
arm of the straightener can result in wire  
wander at the arc. Periodically check the  
groove and replace the arm when badly  
worn. Also replace the ingoing guide at the  
top of the straightener if it shows signs of  
wire milling.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D-6  
D-6  
MAINTENANCE  
2. Check the carriage drive gear teeth.  
If the teeth are badly worn, replace  
the drive gear.  
OPTIONAL FEATURES  
CONTACT ASSEMBLIES  
3. After 5,000 hours of operation, the  
motor and the first reduction gear  
should be removed from the gear box,  
and all the gear teeth should be  
recoated with a good grade of  
graphite grease.  
A dirty or rusty electrode and excessively  
high currents cause rapid wear of the  
contact tips. The nozzle contact tip must be  
replaced when it no longer provides accurate  
wire location or good electrical contact. See  
Sec. T2.2.6, Sec. T2.2.7, or Sec. T2.5.3 of  
the IM305 manual for specific instructions to  
replace contact tips and to perform  
maintenance on other various contact  
assemblies.  
VERTICAL LIFT ADJUSTER  
Every month, add a few drops of SAE-140  
oil or equivalent to the oil cup on the back  
of the vertical lift housing. Every year,  
replace the grease in the top section gear  
cavity with a medium grease. If the unit is  
disassembled for cleaning, apply a layer of  
medium grease to the screw threads of the  
head lift tube and head lift screw. Apply a  
thin layer of grease to the outside diameter  
of the head lift tube and the inside diameter  
of the long hole in the head lift body. Slide  
the head lift tube into the head lift body and  
screw in the head lift screw. Fill the upper  
section gear cavity one-half full of grease.  
Be sure the needle bearings are packed in  
grease.  
WIRE REEL MOUNTING FOR  
50 OR 60 LB (22.7 OR  
27.2 KG) COILS  
Periodically coat the reel shaft with a thin  
layer of grease. No maintenance of the two-  
position adjustable brake is needed except  
to replace the shoe assembly if it wears  
through.  
TRAVEL CARRIAGE  
Periodically:  
1. Disengage the release handle and  
see that the carriage moves freely  
along the beam.  
HORIZONTAL ADJUSTER  
Twice a year, apply a thin coat of grease to  
all sliding surfaces. Every year, replace the  
grease in the gear cavity with a medium  
grease.  
2. Add a few drops of machine oil to  
each of the head lift bearings. This  
can be done through the front  
opening in the carriage.  
HIGH FREQUENCY GENERATOR  
3. Add a few drops of oil to the clutch  
handle bearings.  
Inspect the spark gaps monthly and maintain  
the setting specified on the spark gap cover  
plate.  
4. Add a few drops of oil into each of the  
cups at the travel mounting pivot  
point.  
SPREADARC  
(No change of lubrication is required  
for cold temperature operation.)  
Refer to the maintenance information  
provided in IM305 Sec. T2.5.6.  
Once a year:  
1. Check the motor brushes. If 0.25 in.  
(6.35 mm) or shorter, replace with  
new brushes.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-1  
E-1  
THEORY OF OPERATION  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
-THEORY OF OPERATION SECTION-  
Theory of Operation..................................................................................................................Section E  
General Description..........................................................................................................................E-2  
Input Power Circuits .........................................................................................................................E-2  
Power and Voltage Boards...............................................................................................................E-3  
Control, Logic and Procedure Boards ..............................................................................................E-4  
Optional start, Crater Fill and Weld Timer Boards............................................................................E-5  
SCR Operation.................................................................................................................................E-6  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-2  
E-2  
THEORY OF OPERATION  
GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
The NA-5 is a fully automatic wire feed  
control unit. It is designed for multiple  
process CV operation and can be used  
with a variety of wire feeder heads, con-  
tact nozzles and welding processes.  
The NA-5 control unit enables the oper-  
ator to preset wire feed speed and arc  
voltage on digital meters. These preset  
conditions are internally monitored and  
remain constant until changed by the  
operator.  
FIGURE E.1 Input Circuits  
TACH FEEDBACK (MOTOR RPM)  
CONTACTOR CLOSURE (#2 AND #4)  
ARC VOLTS (SET & ACTUAL)  
REMOTE VOLTAGE CONTROL (A, B, C)  
1/2 AMP  
F501  
WORK SENSING (#21)  
115VAC  
SET VOLTAGE  
(#67)  
ODE SENSING  
VOLTAGE  
BOARD  
R
T
C
E
L
TACH  
TRAVEL  
RECEPTACLE  
D
C
FLUX  
RECEPTACLE  
E
S
U
P
A
R
3
MOTOR  
A
C
CR  
N
D
V
O
L
P
L
Y
S
2
CR  
H
U
T
T
A
INCH  
DOWN  
SWITCH  
A
G
E
START  
STOP  
SWITCH  
V
O
L
R
M
A
T
V
O
L
V
O
L
D
O
W
N
F
I
E
L
D
SWITCH  
1
CR  
T
T
A
G
E
T
U
R
E
A
G
E
A
G
E
OPTIONAL  
START  
BOARD  
VOLTS  
SPEED  
START  
TIMER  
P
DC SUPPLY VOLTAGE  
INPUT  
POWER  
SWITCH  
R
O
C
E
D
U
R
E
STRIKE  
CIRCUIT  
BREAKER  
P
F2  
B
O
A
R
D
R1(2 OHMS)  
OPTIONAL  
CRATER  
BOARD  
O
CRATER  
TIMER  
STRIKE/WELD PROCEDURE  
ENABLE  
LOGIC  
BOARD  
#31  
W
CONTROL  
CABLE  
RECEPTACLE  
115  
VAC  
E
OPTIONAL  
WELD  
TIMER  
R
#32  
F1  
B
O
A
R
D
WELD  
BURNBACK  
TIMER  
FIELD DIRECTION  
MOTOR  
SIGNAL  
F
E
E
D
VOLTS  
SPEED  
ARMATURE  
E
N
A
B
L
WELD  
CURRENT  
REED SWITCH  
G
A
T
T1  
T2  
E
E
S
I
G
N
A
L
S
I
G
N
A
L
115VAC  
SET SPEED  
1
0
V
A
C
36VAC (18+18VAC)  
22VAC  
S
10VDC REFERENCEVOLTAGE  
DC VOLTAGE  
TACH FEEDBACK (MOTOR RPM)  
VOLT  
METER  
BOARD  
SPEED  
METER  
BOARD  
CONTROL  
BOARD  
WIRE FEED SPEED (SET & ACTUAL)  
INCH  
UP  
SWITCH  
DIGITAL  
METER  
DIGITAL  
METER  
INPUT POWER CIRCUITS  
motor. The voltage board receives  
115VAC and transforms and rectifies it  
to 24VDC for the "work touch sensing"  
circuit. The T1 and T2 transformer pri-  
maries are also supplied with 115VAC  
via the F1 (1/2amp) fuse on the power  
board. The T1 and T2 secondary wind-  
ings offer a variety of isolated AC sup-  
ply voltages to the power, logic and  
meter boards.  
The NA-5 control unit is supplied with  
115VAC power usually from the welding  
power source. The 115VAC power is  
connected to the control box circuitry  
through the control cable receptacle,  
the input power switch and a 5 amp cir-  
cuit breaker.  
The 115VAC is applied through a 2 ohm  
resistor to the power board where is  
rectified and controlled to supply arma-  
ture and field voltage to the wire drive  
NOTE: Unshaded areas of block logic diagrams are the subject of discussion.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-3  
E-3  
THEORY OF OPERATION  
FIGURE E.2 Power and Voltage Boards  
TACH FEEDBACK (MOTOR RPM)  
CONTACTOR CLOSURE (#2 AND #4)  
ARC VOLTS (SET & ACTUAL)  
REMOTE VOLTAGE CONTROL (A, B, C)  
1/2 AMP  
F501  
WORK SENSING (#21)  
115VAC  
SET VOLTAGE  
(#67)  
ODE SENSING  
VOLTAGE  
BOARD  
R
T
C
E
L
TACH  
TRAVEL  
RECEPTACLE  
D
C
FLUX  
RECEPTACLE  
E
S
U
P
A
R
3
MOTOR  
A
C
CR  
N
D
V
O
L
P
L
Y
S
2
CR  
H
U
T
T
A
INCH  
DOWN  
SWITCH  
A
G
E
START  
STOP  
SWITCH  
V
O
L
R
M
A
T
V
O
L
V
O
L
D
O
W
N
F
I
E
L
D
SWITCH  
1
CR  
T
T
A
G
E
T
U
R
E
A
G
E
A
G
E
OPTIONAL  
START  
BOARD  
VOLTS  
SPEED  
START  
TIMER  
P
DC SUPPLY VOLTAGE  
INPUT  
POWER  
SWITCH  
R
O
C
E
D
U
R
E
STRIKE  
CIRCUIT  
BREAKER  
P
F2  
B
O
A
R
D
R1(2 OHMS)  
OPTIONAL  
CRATER  
BOARD  
O
CRATER  
TIMER  
STRIKE/WELD PROCEDURE  
ENABLE  
LOGIC  
BOARD  
#31  
W
CONTROL  
CABLE  
RECEPTACLE  
115  
VAC  
E
OPTIONAL  
WELD  
TIMER  
R
#32  
F1  
B
O
A
R
D
WELD  
BURNBACK  
TIMER  
FIELD DIRECTION  
MOTOR  
SIGNAL  
F
E
E
D
VOLTS  
SPEED  
ARMATURE  
E
N
A
B
L
WELD  
CURRENT  
REED SWITCH  
G
A
T
T1  
T2  
E
E
S
I
G
N
A
L
S
I
G
N
A
L
115VAC  
SET SPEED  
1
0
V
A
C
36VAC (18+18VAC)  
22VAC  
S
10VDC REFERENCEVOLTAGE  
DC VOLTAGE  
TACH FEEDBACK (MOTOR RPM)  
VOLT  
METER  
BOARD  
SPEED  
METER  
BOARD  
CONTROL  
BOARD  
WIRE FEED SPEED (SET & ACTUAL)  
INCH  
UP  
SWITCH  
DIGITAL  
METER  
DIGITAL  
METER  
POWER AND VOLTAGE  
BOARDS  
The AC voltages that are received by  
the power board are rectified and regu-  
lated. These DC voltages are supplied  
to the motor, voltage board and control  
board. The two SCR-controlled  
115VDC supplies power the motor  
armature and field circuits.  
The voltage board also generates a low  
DC voltage that is applied to the elec-  
trode during the inch down mode.  
When the electrode makes contact with  
the work piece, this low voltage is  
"loaded down", signaling the control cir-  
cuitry to stop the wire feed motor. This  
feature allows the operator to utilize the  
"work touch sensing" feature.  
The actual arc voltage is sensed at leads  
#67(electrode) and #21(work) which are  
coupled to the voltage board. The pre-  
set voltage requirements are also sent to  
the voltage board. This information is  
compared and processed on the voltage  
board and the resultant correction signal  
is sent to the Lincoln CV power source  
via the remote voltage leads (A,B,C).  
The preset and actual arc voltage infor-  
mation is also sent to the voltage meter  
board where it is processed and dis-  
played on the digital meter.  
If for any reason the actual welding arc  
voltage does not match the set weld  
voltage  
(+/- 0.5Volts) the NA-5 will shutdown.  
This feature insures that the actual  
welding voltage is the same as the pre-  
set voltage during the welding cycle.  
This circuitry is incorporated on the volt-  
age board.  
NOTE: Unshaded areas of block logic diagrams are the subject of discussion.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-4  
E-4  
THEORY OF OPERATION  
FIGURE E.4 Control Logic and Procedure Boards  
TACH FEEDBACK (MOTOR RPM)  
CONTACTOR CLOSURE (#2 AND #4)  
ARC VOLTS (SET & ACTUAL)  
REMOTE VOLTAGE CONTROL (A, B, C)  
1/2 AMP  
F501  
WORK SENSING (#21)  
115VAC  
SET VOLTAGE  
(#67)  
ODE SENSING  
VOLTAGE  
BOARD  
R
T
C
E
L
TACH  
TRAVEL  
RECEPTACLE  
D
C
FLUX  
RECEPTACLE  
E
S
U
P
A
R
3
MOTOR  
A
C
CR  
N
D
V
O
L
P
L
Y
S
2
CR  
H
U
T
T
A
INCH  
DOWN  
SWITCH  
A
G
E
START  
STOP  
SWITCH  
V
O
L
R
M
A
T
V
O
L
V
O
L
D
O
W
N
F
I
E
L
D
SWITCH  
1
CR  
T
T
A
G
E
T
U
R
E
A
G
E
A
G
E
OPTIONAL  
START  
BOARD  
VOLTS  
SPEED  
START  
TIMER  
P
DC SUPPLY VOLTAGE  
INPUT  
POWER  
SWITCH  
R
O
C
E
D
U
R
E
STRIKE  
CIRCUIT  
BREAKER  
P
F2  
B
O
A
R
D
R1(2 OHMS)  
OPTIONAL  
CRATER  
BOARD  
O
CRATER  
TIMER  
STRIKE/WELD PROCEDURE  
ENABLE  
LOGIC  
BOARD  
#31  
W
CONTROL  
CABLE  
RECEPTACLE  
115  
VAC  
E
OPTIONAL  
WELD  
TIMER  
R
#32  
F1  
B
O
A
R
D
WELD  
BURNBACK  
TIMER  
FIELD DIRECTION  
MOTOR  
SIGNAL  
F
E
E
D
VOLTS  
SPEED  
ARMATURE  
E
N
A
B
L
WELD  
CURRENT  
REED SWITCH  
G
A
T
T1  
T2  
E
E
S
I
G
N
A
L
S
I
G
N
A
L
115VAC  
SET SPEED  
1
0
V
A
C
36VAC (18+18VAC)  
22VAC  
S
10VDC REFERENCEVOLTAGE  
DC VOLTAGE  
TACH FEEDBACK (MOTOR RPM)  
VOLT  
METER  
BOARD  
SPEED  
METER  
BOARD  
CONTROL  
BOARD  
WIRE FEED SPEED (SET & ACTUAL)  
INCH  
UP  
SWITCH  
DIGITAL  
METER  
DIGITAL  
METER  
board to proceed from the "strike" settings to the optional  
start board if used, or to the welding wire speed and arc  
voltage parameters.  
CONTROL, LOGIC AND  
PROCEDURE BOARDS  
The logic board interprets and processes the signals it  
receives from the various PC boards, switches and con-  
trols. The logic board also houses a DC power supply  
(+5 -10) which is derived from the 22VAC received from  
the T2 transformer. This DC voltage is also used on the  
procedure board.  
The control board receives information from the logic  
board, the procedure board and the tach feedback cir-  
cuit. The control board then applies the appropriate gate  
signal to the SCR power supply on the power board.  
This variable and regulated DC voltage is applied to the  
motor armature thus controlling the speed of the wire  
feed motor. The preset and actual wire feed speed infor-  
mation is sent to the speed meter board where it is  
processed and displayed on the digital meter.  
The procedure board incorporates the many options  
available with the NA-5. The "strike" and "weld" controls  
are part of the procedure board and are not optional.  
The wire feed speed and arc voltage settings for the vari-  
ous modes are "programmed" through the procedure  
board and are then sent to the logic, voltage and control  
boards at the appropriate times during the welding cycle.  
The burnback time is also coupled through the procedure  
board. This control determines the length of time of  
burnback delay after the stop circuit is energized.  
Depending on the connections on the logic board, it may  
also determine the length of time the wire feed motor  
reverses after the stop button is pressed.  
Upon receiving voltage reference level commands from  
the procedure and voltage boards, or the user-operated  
switches, the logic board sends the appropriate com-  
mand signals to the control and power boards to drive  
the wire feed motor to the proper speed and direction.  
When the "start" signal is received by the logic board the  
power source contact relay (3CR) is energized along  
with the travel relay (2CR) and the flux relay (1CR). The  
"inch down" and "stop" switches signal the logic board  
which then directs the control and power boards to apply  
the appropriate armature and field voltages to the wire  
drive motor. The "inch up" switch, which is connected  
directly to the control board, dictates that the wire drive  
motor reverse direction, backing the electrode wire away  
from the work piece. When the welding current closes  
the reed switch the logic board directs the procedure  
NOTE: Unshaded areas of block logic diagrams are the subject of discussion.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-5  
E-5  
THEORY OF OPERATION  
FIGURE E.3 Optional Start, Crater Fill and Weld Timer Boards  
TACH FEEDBACK (MOTOR RPM)  
CONTACTOR CLOSURE (#2 AND #4)  
ARC VOLTS (SET & ACTUAL)  
REMOTE VOLTAGE CONTROL (A, B, C)  
1/2 AMP  
F501  
WORK SENSING (#21)  
115VAC  
SET VOLTAGE  
(#67)  
ODE SENSING  
VOLTAGE  
BOARD  
R
T
C
E
L
TACH  
TRAVEL  
RECEPTACLE  
D
C
FLUX  
RECEPTACLE  
E
S
U
P
A
R
3
MOTOR  
A
C
CR  
N
D
V
O
L
P
L
Y
S
2
CR  
H
U
T
T
A
INCH  
DOWN  
SWITCH  
A
G
E
START  
STOP  
SWITCH  
V
O
L
R
M
A
T
V
O
L
V
O
L
D
O
W
N
F
I
E
L
D
SWITCH  
1
CR  
T
T
A
G
E
T
U
R
E
A
G
E
A
G
E
OPTIONAL  
START  
BOARD  
VOLTS  
SPEED  
START  
TIMER  
P
DC SUPPLY VOLTAGE  
INPUT  
POWER  
SWITCH  
R
O
C
E
D
U
R
E
STRIKE  
CIRCUIT  
BREAKER  
P
F2  
B
O
A
R
D
R1(2 OHMS)  
OPTIONAL  
CRATER  
BOARD  
O
CRATER  
TIMER  
STRIKE/WELD PROCEDURE  
ENABLE  
LOGIC  
BOARD  
#31  
W
CONTROL  
CABLE  
RECEPTACLE  
115  
VAC  
E
OPTIONAL  
WELD  
TIMER  
R
#32  
F1  
B
O
A
R
D
WELD  
BURNBACK  
TIMER  
FIELD DIRECTION  
MOTOR  
SIGNAL  
F
E
E
D
VOLTS  
SPEED  
ARMATURE  
E
N
A
B
L
WELD  
CURRENT  
REED SWITCH  
G
A
T
T1  
T2  
E
E
S
I
G
N
A
L
S
I
G
N
A
L
115VAC  
SET SPEED  
1
0
V
A
C
36VAC (18+18VAC)  
22VAC  
S
10VDC REFERENCEVOLTAGE  
DC VOLTAGE  
TACH FEEDBACK (MOTOR RPM)  
VOLT  
METER  
BOARD  
SPEED  
METER  
BOARD  
CONTROL  
BOARD  
WIRE FEED SPEED (SET & ACTUAL)  
INCH  
UP  
SWITCH  
DIGITAL  
METER  
DIGITAL  
METER  
OPTIONAL START, CRATER  
FILL AND WELD TIMER  
BOARDS  
When installed, the optional start board  
dictates to the procedure board the  
starting wire feed speed and arc volt-  
age. This condition can be operator set  
for a predetermined period of time.  
These parameters can be set either  
higher or lower than those of the weld-  
ing procedure to control penetration,  
bead shape, or other factors at the start  
of the weld. The start circuit becomes  
active when the weld current sensing  
reed switch is closed.  
is pressed. This optional feature is  
helpful in controlling bead shape and  
filling craters at the end of a weld.  
The weld timer permits setting of weld  
time for an adjustable period of time.  
This feature eliminates the need to  
press the "stop" switch.  
The crater fill board is used by the oper-  
ator to adjust the finishing wire feed  
speed and voltage either higher or  
lower than the welding procedure for an  
adjustable period of time. This circuit  
becomes active when the "stop" switch  
NOTE: Unshaded areas of block logic diagrams are the subject of discussion.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-6  
E-6  
THEORY OF OPERATION  
SCR OPERATION  
A silicon controlled rectifier (SCR) is a three terminal  
device used to control rather large currents to a load.  
An SCR acts very much like a switch. When a gate  
signal is applied to the SCR it is turned ON and there  
is current flow from anode to cathode. In the ON state  
the SCR acts like a closed switch. When the SCR is  
turned OFF there is no current flow from anode to  
cathode thus the device acts like an open switch. As  
the name suggests, the SCR is a rectifier, so it passes  
current only during positive half cycles of the AC sup-  
ply. The positive half cycle is the portion of the sine  
wave in which the anode of the SCR is more positive  
than the cathode.  
these terminals must be slightly greater than 0.6V.  
Once the SCR has fired it is not necessary to continue  
the flow of gate current. As long as current continues  
to flow from anode to cathode the SCR will remain on.  
When the anode to cathode current drops below a  
minimum value, called holding current, the SCR will  
shut off. This normally occurs as the AC supply volt-  
age passes through zero into the negative portion of  
the sine wave. If the SCR is turned on early in the  
positive half cycle, the conduction time is longer  
resulting in greater SCR output. If the gate firing  
occurs later in the cycle the conduction time is less  
resulting in lower SCR output.  
When an AC supply voltage is applied to the SCR, the  
device spends a certain portion of the AC cycle time in  
the on state and the remainder of the time in the off  
state. The amount of time spent in the ON state is  
controlled by the Gate.  
An SCR is fired by a short burst of current into the  
gate. This gate pulse must be more positive than the  
cathode voltage. Since there is a standard PN junc-  
tion between gate and cathode, the voltage between  
INPUT  
CATHODE  
OUTPUT  
NOTE: AS THE GATE  
PULSE IS APPLIED  
LATER IN THE CYCLE  
THE SCR OUTPUT  
IS DECREASED.  
ANODE  
GATE  
GATE  
FIGURE E.4 SCR Operation  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECTION F-1  
SECTION F-1  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
-TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR SECTION-  
Troubleshooting and Repair......................................................................................................Section F  
How to Use Troubleshooting Guide......................................................................................................F-2  
PC Board Troubleshooting Procedures................................................................................................F-3  
Troubleshooting Guide .........................................................................................................................F-4  
PC Board LED Definitions ..................................................................................................................F-36  
PC Board LED Sequence Table.........................................................................................................F-37  
Test Procedures .................................................................................................................................F-38  
DC Power Supply Test....................................................................................................................F-38  
T1 and T2 Transformer Test ...........................................................................................................F-42  
Voltage Board Transformer Test.....................................................................................................F-45  
Wire Feed Drive Motor Test ............................................................................................................F-48  
External Resistance Test (Leads #21 and #67)..............................................................................F-50  
Out of Voltage Range Shut Sown Test ...........................................................................................F-52  
Tach Board Feedback Test.............................................................................................................F-55  
VoltmeterAccuracy Test ..................................................................................................................F-57  
Wire Speed Accuracy Test..............................................................................................................F-60  
Meter Circuit Accuracy Test ............................................................................................................F-64  
Replacement Procedures...................................................................................................................F-71  
PC Board(s) Removal and Replacement ........................................................................................F-71  
Digital Meter and Meter PC Board Removal and Replacement......................................................F-73  
Tach PC Board Removal and Replacement ...................................................................................F-77  
Wire Drive Motor Removal and Replacement.................................................................................F-81  
Retest After Repair.............................................................................................................................F-85  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-2  
F-2  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
HOW TO USE TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE  
WARNING  
Service and Repair should only be performed by Lincoln Electric Factory Trained Personnel.  
Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment may result in danger to the technician and  
machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For your safety and to avoid  
Electrical Shock, please observe all safety notes and precautions detailed throughout this  
manual.  
__________________________________________________________________________  
out removing the case wrap-around cover.  
This Troubleshooting Guide is provided to  
help you locate and repair possible machine  
malfunctions. Simply follow the three-step  
procedure listed below.  
Step 3. RECOMMENDED COURSE OF  
ACTION  
The last column labeled “Recommended  
Course of Action” lists the most likely com-  
ponents that may have failed in your  
machine. It also specifies the appropriate  
test procedure to verify that the subject  
component is either good or bad. If there  
are a number of possible components,  
check the components in the order listed to  
eliminate one possibility at a time until you  
locate the cause of your problem.  
Step 1. LOCATE PROBLEM (SYMPTOM).  
Look under the column labeled “PROBLEM  
(SYMPTOMS)”. This column describes  
possible symptoms that the machine may  
exhibit. Find the listing that best describes  
the symptom that the machine is exhibiting.  
Symptoms are grouped into the following  
categories: wire feeding problems, mode  
function problems, function problems and  
welding problems.  
All of the referenced test procedures  
referred to in the Troubleshooting Guide are  
described in detail at the end of this chap-  
ter. Refer to the Troubleshooting and Repair  
Table of Contents to locate each specific  
Test Procedure. All of the specified test  
points, components, terminal strips, etc. can  
be found on the referenced electrical wiring  
diagrams and schematics. Refer to the  
Electrical Diagrams Section Table of  
Contents to locate the appropriate diagram.  
Step 2. PERFORM EXTERNAL TESTS.  
The second column labeled “POSSIBLE  
AREAS OF MISADJUSTMENT(S)” lists the  
obvious external possibilities that may con-  
tribute to the machine symptom. Perform  
these tests/checks in the order listed. In  
general, these tests can be conducted with-  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the  
tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric Service Department for technical trou-  
bleshooting assistance before you proceed call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
_____________________________________________________________  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-3  
F-3  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
PC BOARD TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES  
- Remove the P.C. Board from the static-  
shielding bag and place it directly into the  
equipment. Don’t set the P.C. Board on or  
near paper, plastic or cloth which could have  
a static charge. If the P.C. Board can’t be  
installed immediately, put it back in the static-  
shielding bag.  
WARNING  
ELECTRIC SHOCK can kill.  
Have an electrician install  
and service this equip-  
ment. Turn the input power  
OFF at the fuse box before  
working on equipment. Do  
not touch electrically hot  
- If the P.C. Board uses protective shorting  
jumpers, don’t remove them until installation  
is complete.  
parts.  
_______________________________  
CAUTION: Sometimes machine failures  
appear to be due to PC board failures. These  
problems can sometimes be traced to poor  
electrical connections. To avoid problems  
when troubleshooting and replacing PC  
boards, please use the following procedure:  
- If you return a P.C. Board to The Lincoln  
Electric Company for credit, it must be in the  
static-shielding bag. This will prevent further  
damage and allow proper failure analysis.  
4. Test the machine to determine if the fail-  
ure symptom has been corrected by the  
replacement PC board.  
1. Determine to the best of your technical  
ability that the PC board is the most likely  
component causing the failure symptom.  
NOTE: It is desirable to have a spare (known  
good) PC board available for PC board trou-  
bleshooting.  
2. Check for loose connections at the PC  
board to assure that the PC board is prop-  
erly connected.  
NOTE: Allow the machine to heat up so that  
all electrical components can reach their oper-  
ating temperature.  
3. If the problem persists, replace the sus-  
pect PC board using standard practices to  
avoid static electrical damage and electri-  
cal shock. Read the warning inside the  
static resistant bag and perform the follow-  
ing procedures:  
5. Remove the replacement PC board and  
substitute it with the original PC board to  
recreate the original problem.  
a. If the original problem does not reap-  
pear by substituting the original  
board, then the PC board was not the  
problem. Continue to look for bad  
connections in the control wiring har-  
ness, junction blocks, and terminal  
strips.  
P.C. Board can be dam-  
aged by static electricity.  
- Remove your body’s stat-  
ic charge before opening  
the static-shielding bag.  
Wear an anti-static wrist  
strap. For safety, use a 1  
Meg ohm resistive cord  
connected to a grounded  
part of the equipment  
frame.  
ATTENTION  
Static-Sensitive  
Devices  
Handle only at  
Static-Safe  
Workstations  
b. If the original problem is recreated by  
the substitution of the original board,  
then the PC board was the problem.  
Reinstall the replacement PC board  
and test the machine.  
Reusable  
Container  
Do Not Destroy  
- If you don’t have a wrist  
strap, touch an unpainted,  
grounded, part of the  
equipment frame. Keep touching the frame to  
prevent static build-up. Be sure not to touch  
any electrically live parts at the same time.  
6. Always indicate that this procedure was  
followed when warranty reports are to be  
submitted.  
NOTE: Following this procedure and writing  
on the warranty report, “INSTALLED AND  
SWITCHED PC BOARDS TO VERIFY  
PROBLEM,” will help avoid denial of legiti-  
mate PC board warranty claims.  
- Tools which come in contact with the P.C.  
Board must be either conductive, anti-static or  
static-dissipative.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-4  
F-4  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
WIRE FEEDING PROBLEMS  
The wire feeds whenever the input  
power switch is in the “ON” position.  
1. Check the “Start” switch (S5).  
Make sure it is not stuck closed.  
1. Check light 7B on the logic board.  
It should NOT be on. If light 7B is  
ON remove lead #518A from the  
“Start” switch. If the light remains  
ON the logic board may be faulty.  
If the light goes OFF check the  
switch and associated leads.  
See wiring diagram and Figure  
F.1.  
2. Check the “Inch Down” switch  
(S4). Make sure it is not stuck  
closed.  
3. Check the “Inch Up” switch (S3)  
Make sure it is not stuck closed.  
4. Check to make sure that jumper 2. Check light 7J on the logic board.  
lead #693 is connected to the  
proper pin on the logic board.  
See wiring diagram.  
It should NOT be on. If light 7J is  
ON remove lead #592 from the  
“Inch Down” switch. If the light  
remains ON the logic board may  
be faulty. If the light goes OFF  
check the switch and associated  
leads. See wiring diagram and  
Figure F.1.  
3. |Disconnect lead #586 from the  
“Inch Up” switch. If the problem  
is resolved check the switch and  
associated leads. See wiring dia-  
gram.  
4. Check lights 7B, 7J and 7E.  
They should all be OFF. If lights  
7B and 7J are OFF and light 7E  
is ON the logic board may be  
faulty. See Figure F.1.  
5. Disconnect plug “A” from the logic  
board. If the wire feed stops the  
logic board may be faulty. See  
Figure F.1.  
6. If the feed does not stop with plug  
“A” disconnected, disconnect plug  
“E” from the logic board. If the  
wire feed stops with plug “E” dis-  
connected the logic board may be  
faulty. If the wire feed does NOT  
stop with plug “E” disconnected  
the power board may be faulty.  
Replace. See Figure F.1.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-5  
F-5  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
WIRE FEEDING PROBLEMS  
The wire does not feed. Pressing  
any of the switches (buttons) will  
NOT feed the wire. The motor does  
NOT run.  
1. Make sure input power switch is 1. Check the lights (LEDS) locate on  
ON.  
the PC boards. Some should be  
lit. See Table F.1. If none of the  
lights are lit perform the T1 and  
2. Check the circuit breaker (CB1).  
Reset if tripped.  
T2  
Transformer  
Test.  
3. Make sure 115VAC is being  
applied to the control box through  
the control cable receptacle.  
Leads #31 and #32.  
2. If the appropriate lights are lit  
(see Table F.1.) and the wire  
does NOT feed perform the Wire  
Drive Motor Test.  
4. Check the two fuses on the  
power board. Replace if blown. If  
fuse F101 immediately fails when  
replaced contact your local  
3. If only some of the appropriate  
lights on the power board are lit  
the power board may be faulty.  
Lincoln Authorized Field Service 4. If all of the appropriate lights are  
Facility.  
lit, except light 1D on the power,  
board, check resistor R1. Normal  
resistance is 2 ohms. See wiring  
diagram.  
5. Make sure the motor cable is con-  
nected to the motor receptacle on  
the NA-5 control box.  
5. If fuse F101 immediately fails  
when input power is applied,  
unplug all of the PC boards  
except the power board. If the  
fuse still fails the power board  
may be faulty. If the fuse does  
not fail reconnect the PC boards  
one at a time until the faulty  
board is located. Also check and  
inspect the wiring harness for  
“short” or “grounds”. Reconnect  
the PC boards in the following  
order: control, voltage,logic,pro-  
cedure,option,timer, remote inter-  
face,speedmeter and voltmeter.  
NOTE: Some of the above PC  
boards are optional and may not  
be used in all NA-5 control units.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-6  
F-6  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
WIRE FEEDING PROBLEMS  
The wire will not feed and the circuit 1. Check for a mechanical restric-  
1. Perform the Wire Drive Motor  
breaker (CB1) trips when the inch  
down, inch up or the start buttons  
are pressed. The wire drive motor  
does not turn.  
tion in the wire feeding path.  
Test.  
2. Make sure the proper input volt- 2. The power board may be faulty.  
age (115VAC) is applied to the  
NA-5 control unit.  
See Table F.1.  
3. Check the motor control cable for  
“shorts’ or “grounds”.  
3. Check the F102 field fuse on the  
power board. Replace if faulty.  
Note: Frequent motor polarity  
changes can cause the fuse to  
fail. This can be caused by the  
following:  
•A welding procedure with  
frequent electrode to puddle  
shorting.  
•A power source output too  
low to establish an arc.  
When the inch up button is press the 1. The welding head is designed to  
wire feeds down. When the inch  
down button is pressed the wire  
feeds up.  
feed wire in the proper direction  
when it is installed as shipped  
from the factory. If the nozzle  
and wire straightener aare rotated  
about the axis of the gearbox  
outpu shaft, the wire may feed in  
the opposite direction.  
Interchange leads #626 and #627  
at the terminal strip (TS2) inside  
the control box. See wiring dia-  
gram.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-7  
F-7  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
WIRE FEEDING PROBLEMS  
The wire will not feed when the inch 1. If a DC400, Pulse Power 500 or a 1. Disconnect the white #21 lead  
down button is pressed. The wire  
does inch up OK and feeds down  
when the start button is pressed.  
CV400 power source is used a  
Diode Kit must be installed in the  
power source.  
from the NA-5 polarity terminal  
strip (TS1). See wiring diagram.  
With the inch down button  
pressed read the ACTUAL volts  
on the NA-5 digital voltmeter.  
The digital meter should read  
over 19 volts and the wire should  
inch down. If not, perform the  
Voltage Board Transformer  
Test. If the test is OK the voltage  
board may be faulty. Replace.  
2. Check to see if light 7J on the  
logic board is ON while the inch  
down button is pressed. If it does  
NOT light check the inch down  
button and associated leads.  
See wiring diagram.  
•(For codes below 8300) If  
light 7J DOES light when  
the inch down button is  
pressed the logic board  
may be faulty.  
2. If the voltage is over 19 volts  
and the wire DOES inch down  
with the #21 lead disconnected  
reconnect the #21 lead to the  
terminal strip and read the  
ACTUAL volts with the inch  
down button pressed. If the  
voltage is less than 8 volts per-  
form the #21 - #67 External  
Resistance Test. If the resis-  
tance test is OK the voltage  
board may be faulty. Replace.  
•(For codes above 8300)  
Jumper the AUTO tabs on  
the voltage board and press  
inch down button. If the  
wire does NOT feed down  
the logic board may be  
faulty.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-8  
F-8  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
WIRE FEEDING PROBLEMS  
The wire will not inch down but does 1. Check to make sure that light 7J, 1. The logic board may be faulty.  
inch up properly. The wire does not  
feed in either direction when the start  
button is pressed.  
on the logic board, is lit when the  
inch down button is pressed. If  
not check the inch down switch  
and associated leads. See wiring  
diagram.  
Replace.  
2. The power board may be faulty.  
Replace.  
2. Check to make sure that light 7B,  
on the logic board, is lit when the  
start button is pressed. If not  
check the start button and associ-  
ated leads. See wiring diagram.  
The wire will not inch down but does 1. For codes below 8300 make sure 1. Jumper the AUTO tabs on the  
inch up properly. When the start  
button is pressed the wire feeds up  
instead of down.  
the jumper plug is securely  
installed in the harness receptacle  
near the voltage board.  
voltage board. (Above code  
8300) Press the inch down but-  
ton. If the wire inches down the  
voltage board may be faulty.  
Replace.  
2. Check to make sure light 7E, on  
the logic board, is on when the  
inch down button is pressed. If  
light 7E is ON the power board  
may be faulty.  
If the wire does NOT inch down  
the logic board may be faulty.  
Replace.  
3. Check the 1/8 amp fuse on the  
voltage board . Replace if faulty.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-9  
F-9  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
WIRE FEEDING PROBLEMS  
NA-5 units above code 8300 with  
“cold starting”.  
The wire feeds up instead of down  
when the start button is pressed.  
The wire inches up and down prop-  
erly.  
1. Make sure the electrode wire is  
fed into the welding tip.  
1. Jumper the #2 and #4 leads at  
the Lincoln CV power source.  
Open circuit voltage should be  
present at both the power source  
and at the ACTUAL voltmeter  
reading on the NA-5. If open cir-  
cuit voltage is present at the  
power source but NOT at the NA-  
5 ACTUAL voltmeter reading per-  
form the #21-#67 External resis-  
tance Test.  
2. Check the 1/8 amp fuse on the  
voltage board. Replace if faulty.  
3. Make sure electrode polarity is  
correct and the same as the #67  
and #21 leads at terminal strip  
(TS1). See wiring diagram.  
4. Make sure the welding power  
source is producing welding arc 2. With the start button pressed light  
voltage.  
7K should be lit. If it is not the  
logic board may be faulty.  
3. Check contactor relay 3CR.  
Leads #2 and #4 are closed by  
relay 3CR. Make sure the relay is  
functiioning properly.  
4. Check the control cable between  
the power source and the NA-5  
control unit. See wiring diagram.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-10  
F-10  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
WIRE FEEDING PROBLEMS  
NA-5 units above code 8300 with  
“cold starting”.  
1. Check the 1/8 amp fuse on the  
voltage board. Replace if faulty.  
1. Perform the #21-#67 External  
ResistanceTest.  
While pressing the inch down button  
the wire does not stop when it touch- 2. While pressing the inch down but- 2. Check the continuity of leads  
es the work.  
ton with the wire touching the  
work piece, observe light 7G on  
the logic board. If the light goes  
on but the wire does NOT stop  
feeding the logic board may be  
faulty.  
#667 and #621 to the voltage  
board. See wiring diagram.  
3. The logic board may be faulty.  
4. The voltage board may be faulty.  
The wire will NOT inch up but does 1. With the unit at idle (no buttons  
1. Check the inch up switch (button)  
for proper operation. Also check  
associated leads for loose or  
faulty connections. See wiring  
diagram.  
inch down and weld properly.  
pressed) observe lights 1D, on  
the power board, and light 7E, on  
the logic board. 1D should be  
ON. 7E should be OFF.  
2. If 1D is OFF replace the power  
board.  
3. If 7E is ON replace the logic  
board.  
The wire feeds UP when either inch 1. While pressing the inch down but- 1. Check the inch up and inch down  
button is pressed.  
ton observe light 7E on the logic  
board. It should be ON.  
switches (buttons) for proper oper-  
ation and wiring. See wiring dia-  
gram.  
2. If light 7E is ON, while the inch  
down button is pressed, the  
power board may be faulty.  
Replace.  
3. If light 7E remains OFF, while  
the inch down button is pressed,  
the logic board may be faulty.  
Replace.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-11  
F-11  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
WIRE FEEDING PROBLEMS  
The wire feeds down when either  
inch button is pressed.  
1. Wth the unit at idle (no buttons  
pressed) observe light 7E on the  
logic board. It should be OFF.  
1. Check the inch up and inch down  
switches (buttons) for proper oper-  
ation and wiring. See wiring dia-  
gram.  
2. If light 7E is ON the logic board  
may be faulty. Replace.  
3. If light 7E is OFF the power board  
may be faulty. Replace.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-12  
F-12  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
MODE FUNCTION PROBLEMS  
The speed and voltage controls do 1. Check lights 1A and 1B located  
1. If lights 1A and /or 1B are OFF  
perform the DC Power Supply  
Test.  
not function. All of the mode lights  
function properly.  
on the power board. They should  
both be ON.  
2. If both lights 1A and 1B are ON  
the control board may be faulty.  
Replace.  
2. Perform the T1 and T2  
Transformer Test.  
3. The power board may be faulty.  
Replace.  
All the mode lights function properly. 1. The control board may be faulty.  
None of the speed controls operate  
properly.  
Replace.  
All the mode lights function properly. 1. The voltage board may be faulty.  
None of the voltage controls operate  
properly.  
Replace.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-13  
F-13  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
MODE FUNCTION PROBLEMS  
Only the strike mode functions, when 1. The logic board may be faulty.  
the unit is at idle, regardless of the  
selector switch position.  
Replace.  
2. The procedure board may be  
faulty.  
Only the strike mode functions while 1. While the unit is welding check  
. If light 7D is NOT lit, when weld  
current is present, connect a  
jumper wire from terminal #528 to  
#500 on terminal strip TS1. See  
wiring diagram. If light 7D does  
light check the CR4 reed switch  
and associated leads and connec-  
tions. See wiring diagram.  
welding. The unit stays in the strike  
mode and does not progress through  
the welding sequence.  
light 7D on the logic board. It  
should be ON when welding cur-  
rent is present. If light 7D is ON  
the logic board may be faulty.  
3. If light 7D is NOT lit when weld  
current is present make sure the  
weld cables have been properly  
routed through the cable clamp  
on the left side of the control box.  
2. If 7D does NOT light, with the  
jumper wire in place, check the  
#528 lead and the #500 lead  
between the TS1 terminal strip  
and the logic board. See wiring  
diagram.  
3. The logic board may be faulty.  
Replace.  
The strike light is OFF and neither  
strike control functions. The other  
mode lights work. The unit will not  
feed wire when the start button is  
pressed.  
1. Check light 7D on the logic board. 1. If light 7D is ON check the CR4  
If it is off the logic board may be reed switch and associated leads.  
faulty. Replace.  
See wiring diagram.  
2. If the start light is on all the time  
the start board (if used) may be  
faulty. Replace or install jumper  
plug in procedure board.  
3. If the crater light is on all the time  
the crater board (if used) may be  
faulty. Replace or install jumper  
plug in procedure board.  
4. If the weld light is on all the time  
the logic board may be faulty.  
Replace.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-14  
F-14  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
MODE FUNCTION PROBLEMS  
The strike light does not light. The 1. The procedure board may be  
strike controls (voltage and wire feed  
speed) do function normally.  
faulty. Replace.  
The strike light comes on but the  
strike controls (voltage and wire feed  
speed) do not function normally.  
1. The procedure board may be  
faulty. Replace.  
The start light does not light. The  
start controls (voltage and wire feed  
speed) may or may not function nor-  
mally. The NA-5 is at idle with the  
selector switch in the “Start” position.  
1. Make sure the start option board 1. Check the lead harness between  
is installed correctly.  
the start option board and the  
procedure board for loose or  
faulty connections. See wiring  
diagram.  
2. The procedure board may be  
faulty. Replace.  
The start light is ON but the start  
controls (voltage and wire feed  
speed) do not function. The NA-5 is  
at idle with the selector switch in the  
“Start” position.  
1. If no other mode lights are lit the 1. Check the lead harness between  
start option board may be faulty.  
Replace.  
the start option board and the  
procedure board for loose or  
faulty connections. See wiring  
diagram.  
2. If the strike light is also lit (along  
with the start light) the logic board  
may be faulty.  
3. If the weld and or crater lights are  
also lit (along with the start light)  
the procedure board may be  
faulty.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-15  
F-15  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
MODE FUNCTION PROBLEMS  
When the start button is pressed and 1. Make sure the start option is in- 1. Check the lead harness between  
the unit is welding, the start mode is  
skipped.  
stalled properly in the NA-5.  
the start option boards and the  
procedure board for loose or  
faulty connections. See wiring  
diagram.  
2. Make sure the start timer is set  
for a time greater than zero sec-  
onds.  
3. If the weld light goes ON as soon  
as (but not before) the arc is  
struck and the start timer is set  
for a time greater than zero sec-  
onds, the start timer board may  
be faulty.  
4. If the weld light goes ON before  
the arc is struck replace the start  
option board with the jumper  
plug. If the weld light continues  
to go ON before the arc is struck  
the logic board may be faulty.  
Replace.  
5. With the jumper plug installed: If  
the weld light does NOT go ON  
until the arc is struck the start  
option board may be faulty.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-16  
F-16  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
MODE FUNCTION PROBLEMS  
When welding the start timer does  
not time out. The unit stays in the  
start mode.  
1. When the weld is stopped check 1. Check the lead harness between  
to see if the crater (if used) or  
burnback timer is functioning  
properly. If the crater and or burn-  
back timer IS functioning properly  
the start timer may be faulty.  
the start option boards and the  
procedure board for loose or  
faulty connections. See wiring  
diagram.  
2. If the start, crater and burnback  
timers are not working properly  
the procedure board may be  
faulty.  
The crater light does not light. The 1. Make sure the crater option  
1. Check the lead harness between  
the crater option boards and the  
procedure board for loose or  
faulty connections. See wiring  
diagram.  
crater controls (voltage and wire  
feed speed) may or may not func-  
tion. The NA-5 is at idle with the  
selector switch in the ”Crater” pos-  
tion.  
boards are installed correctly.  
2. The procedure board may be  
faulty. Replace.  
The crater light is ON but the crater 1. If no other lights are lit the crater 1. Check the lead harness between  
controls (voltage and wire feed  
speed) do not function. The NA-5 is  
at idle with the selector switch in the  
“Crater” position.  
option board may be faulty.  
Replace.  
the crater option boards and the  
procedure board for loose or faulty  
connections. See wiring diagram.  
2. If the strike light is also lit (along  
with the crater light) the logic  
board may be faulty.  
3. If the weld and or start lights are  
also lit (along with the crater light)  
the procedure board may be  
faulty.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-17  
F-17  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
MODE FUNCTION PROBLEMS  
At the end of the weld the crater light 1. Make sure the crater option is  
1. Check the lead harness between  
the crater boards and the proce-  
dure board for loose or faulty con-  
nections. See wiring diagram.  
does NOT light.  
installed properly in the NA-5.  
2. Make sure the crater timer is set  
for a time greater than zero sec-  
onds.  
3. The crater option and or timer  
board may be faulty. Replace.  
4. The logic board may be faulty.  
At the end of the weld the crater  
timer does not time out. The unit  
stays in the crater mode.  
1. Replace the crater option board 1. Check the lead harness between  
with the jumper plug. Set the  
burnback timer for any time  
the crater boards and the proce-  
dure board for loose or faulty con-  
nections. See wiring diagram.  
greater than zero seconds. If the  
unit then stops after the weld and  
burnback time, the crater timer  
board may be faulty. Replace.  
2. If the unit does not stop the pro-  
cedure board may be faulty.  
No burnback/retract occurs at the  
end of the weld.  
1. Make sure the burnback timer is 1. Check the lead harness between  
set for a time greater than zero  
ohms.  
the burnback module and the pro-  
cedure board for loose or faulty  
connections.  
2. Be sure the jumper leads or dip  
switches on the logic board are  
comfigured correctly for the burn-  
back/retract desired. See wiring  
diagram.  
3. The burnback timer module may  
be faulty. Replace.  
4. The procedure board may be  
faulty.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-18  
F-18  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
MODE FUNCTION PROBLEMS  
The burnback timer does not time  
out properly.  
1. Test if the other timers (start,  
weld, crater) function properly. If  
they time out correctly the burn-  
back module may be faulty.  
Replace.  
1. Check the lead harness between  
the burnback module and the pro-  
cedure board for loose or faulty  
connections.  
2. If the other timers (start, weld,  
crater) do NOT function correctly  
the procedure board may be  
faulty.  
The weld light does not light. The  
weld controls (voltage and wire feed  
speed) may or may not function.  
The NA-5 is at idle with the selector  
switch in the “Weld” position.  
1. The procedure board may be  
faulty. Replace.  
The weld light is ON but the weld  
controls (voltage and wire feed  
speed) do not function. The NA-5 is  
at idle with the selector switch in the  
“Weld” postion.  
1. If the option boards (start and  
crater) are not installed make  
sure the jumper plugs are  
installed in the procedure board.  
2. If the strike light is also lit (along  
with the weld light) the logic  
board may be faulty.  
3. The procedure board may be  
faulty. Replace.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-19  
F-19  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
MODE FUNCTION PROBLEMS  
During the welding sequence the  
weld light does not go ON.  
1. If the optional start timer is  
installed determine if the start  
mode is timing out. If the  
sequence stays in the “start”  
mode the start timer may be  
faulty.  
2. If the start module is OK and the  
weld light does not go ON the  
logic board may be faulty.  
Replace.  
3. If a start module is NOT used  
make sure the jumper plug is  
installled in the procedure board  
receptacle.  
While welding the weld mode is  
omitted in the welding sequence.  
The weld timer is set for a longer  
time than zero seconds.  
1. The weld timer module may be  
faulty. Replace.  
1. Check the lead harness between  
the weld timer and the procedure  
board for loose or faulty connec-  
tions.  
The weld timer does not time out.  
the unit stays in the weld mode.  
1. Set the burnback timer for a value 1. Check the lead harness between  
greater than zero seconds. Start  
the weld sequence and then stop  
it with the stop button. Check to  
see if the unit returns to the nor-  
mal idle state.(Strike light ON and  
“Hot Electrode” light OFF).  
• If the weld mode ends and  
the unit returns to the nor-  
mal idle state, the weld  
the weld timer and the procedure  
board for loose or faulty connec-  
tions.  
timer module may be  
faulty.  
• If the unit does NOT return  
to the normal idle state the  
procedure board may be  
faulty.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-20  
F-20  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
FUNCTION PROBLEMS  
The start button does not initiate the 1. If the crater and or start option  
1. If light 7C is ON check the stop  
button and associated leads for  
“shorts” or “grounds”. Light 7C  
should be on ONLY when the  
stop button is pressed.  
power source output or the wire  
feed. The mode selector switch is in  
the strike position and the mode  
strike light is lit.  
boards are NOT used the jumper  
plugs must be installed in the pro-  
cedure board receptacles.  
2. With the unit at idle check light 7C  
on the logic board. It should be  
OFF. Also check light 7B on the  
logic board. With the start button  
pressed light 7B should go ON. If  
lights 7C and 7B are functioning  
normally the logic board may be  
faulty.  
2. If light 7B does NOT go on, when  
the start button is pressed, check  
the start switch (button) and asso-  
ciated leads for loose or faulty  
connections. See wiring diagram.  
3. Check the lead harness between  
the logic board and the procedure  
board for loose or faulty connec-  
tions. See wiring diagram.  
The start button initiates the power 1. If the wire inches up properly, but 1. If the wire does not feed when the  
source output, but the wire does not  
feed.  
does not feed when the start but-  
ton is pressed, the logic board  
may be faulty.  
inch up button is pressed perform  
the Wire Drive Motor Test.  
2. If the wire does NOT feed, when  
the inch up button is pressed,  
check light 1E on the power  
board. It should go ON when the  
inch up button is pressed. If light  
1E does not go on when the inch  
up button is pressed the control  
board may be faulty.  
3. The power board may be faulty.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-21  
F-21  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
FUNCTION PROBLEMS  
The start button initiates the wire  
feed, but does not activiate the  
power source output.  
1. Make sure that lead #690 is con- 1. The CR3 relay may be faulty.  
nected to the proper pin on the  
logic board. On newer logic  
Check or replace.  
boards the dip switches must be 2. Check the #2 and #4 leads  
in the proper position. See wiring  
diagram.  
between the CR3 relay and the  
control cable receptacle. See  
wiring diagram.  
2. Make sure the power source is  
capable of producing welding  
output voltage. Jumper #2 and  
#4 at the power source’s terminal  
strip. This should produce open  
circuit voltage at the output termi-  
nals. If open circuit voltage is not  
present the power source may be  
faulty.  
3. Check or replace the control  
cable between the NA-5 and the  
power source.  
4. With the start button pressed  
check light 7K on the logic board  
and the “Electrode Hot” light.  
Both lights should be on. If the  
lights are OFF unplug the burn-  
back timer. If the problem is  
resolved the burnback timer may  
be faulty. Replace.  
5. The logic board may be faulty.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-22  
F-22  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
TRAVEL FUNCTION PROBLEMS  
The travel function will not operate  
regardless of the travel switch posi-  
tion.  
1. Check the travel switch for proper 1. With the travel switch (S2) in the  
operation. Also check associat-  
ed leads for loose or faulty con-  
nections.  
hand travel position, and the  
115VAC input power applied to  
the NA-5 unit, check for 115VAC  
at the travel receptacle. 115VAC  
should be present at leads #531  
to #532. 115VAC should also be  
present at leads #25 to #531. If  
either of these two voltages are  
missing or not correct check the  
lead harness, switch (S2) and  
travel receptacle for loose or  
faulty connections. See wiring  
diagram.  
2. Check the travel receptacle and  
associated leads for loose or  
faulty connections.  
3. Make sure the travel unit is oper-  
ational.  
2. If the above voltages are correct  
the problem is in the travel unit or  
connecting cable.  
The travel will not function with the  
travel switch in the “Hand” travel  
position. The unit operates properly  
with the travel switch in the “Auto”  
position.  
1. Check the travel switch and asso- 1. The travel switch may be faulty.  
ciated leads for loose or faulty  
connectioins.  
Check or replace.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-23  
F-23  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
TRAVEL FUNCTION PROBLEMS  
The travel will not function with the  
travel switch in the “Auto” postion.  
The travel operates correctly with the  
travel switch in the “Hand” position.  
1. Make sure the jumper leads #691 1. If light 7H, located on the logic  
and #692 are connected properly  
to the correct pins on the logic  
board. See wiring diagram.  
board, does light when the auto-  
matic travel is active check the  
CR2 relay. Normal coil resis-  
tance is 10,000 ohms. The con-  
tacts (terminals 2 and 4) should  
“close” when 110VDC is applied  
to the relay coil (terminals 1 +  
and 3 -).  
2. Check the travel switch (S2) and  
associated leads for loose or  
faulty connections. See wiring  
diagram.  
3. Check light 7H located on the  
logic board. This light should be  
ON when the “Auto” travel is  
active. If light 7H does not light  
the logic board may be faulty.  
The travel runs continuously when  
the travel switch is in the “Auto” posi-  
tion.  
1. Make sure the jumper leads #691 1. The 2CR relay may be faulty.  
and #692 are connected properly  
to the correct pins on the logic  
board. See wiring diagram.  
The contacts (terminals 2 and 4)  
may be stuck closed.  
2. Check the associated leads for  
misconnections. See wiring dia-  
gram.  
2. Check light 7H on the logic board.  
If light 7H is always ON the logic  
board may be faulty.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-24  
F-24  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
FUNCTION PROBLEMS  
After pressing the stop button, the  
electrode “Hot” light goes OFF, but  
the electrode wire remains electrical-  
ly hot. (The welding voltage is  
always present). The wire stops  
feeding.  
1. Carefully disconnect the #2 lead 1. The 3CR relay may be faulty.  
from the power source terminal  
strip. The welding voltage should  
be disabled. If the welding volt-  
age is still present the power  
source is faulty.  
The contacts (terminals 2 and 4)  
may be stuck closed.  
2. Check the associated leads for  
misconnections. See wiring dia-  
gram.  
2. Check or replace the control  
cable between the power source  
and the NA-5 unit.  
After pressing the stop button, the  
weld light remains on and the wire  
continues to feed.  
1. If a crater option module is used, 1. If, while pressing the stop button,  
check to make sure the logic  
board jumper (#694) is on pin  
P10.  
light 7C does NOT go on, check  
the stop button and associated  
leads.  
2. While pressing the stop button  
observe light 7C located on the  
logic board. It should be lit. If  
light 7C is ON and the wire feed-  
ing and welding does not stop,  
the logic board may be faulty.  
The set and actual speed meter  
readings match within a few IPM, but  
both are in error.  
1. Made sure the calibration jumper 1. Remove the drive motor end cap  
on the speedmeter board is con-  
nected properly. See Operation  
Section.  
and the tach cover plate from the  
end of the wire drive motor.  
Check to make sure the slotted  
disc is secure and aligned and  
rotates freely through the center  
of the module pick-up.  
2. Perform the Wire Speed  
Accuracy Test  
3. Perform the Meter Circuit  
Accuracy Test.  
4. The control board may be faulty.  
Replace.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-25  
F-25  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
FUNCTION PROBLEMS  
The set speed and actual speed  
meter readings do not match within a  
few IPM. One or both readings may  
be erratic.  
1. Contact your local Lincoln  
1. Check the lead and switch conti-  
nuity of the SET speedmeter cir-  
cuit. See wiring diagram.  
Authorized Field Service Facility.  
2. Check the lead and switch conti-  
nuity of the ACTUAL speedmeter  
circuit. See wiring diagram.  
3. Perform the Wire Speed  
Accuracy Test  
4. Perform the Meter Circuit  
Accuracy Test.  
5. The control board may be fault  
The set speed is adjustable and  
steady. The actual speed is uncon-  
trollable. The meter displays the  
actual speed correctly.  
1. Contact your local Lincoln  
1. While the motor is running care-  
fully unplug the 15 pin molex from  
the control board.  
Authorized Field Service Facility.  
A. If the motor continues to  
run the power board may  
be faulty. Replace.  
B. If the motor stops the  
control board may be  
faulty. Replace.  
2. Perform the Wire Drive Motor  
Test.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-26  
F-26  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
FUNCTION PROBLEMS  
The set speed is adjustable and  
steady. The actual speed reading is  
incorrect and or erratic.  
1. Check that the jumper plug is  
installed securely in the harness  
receptacle near the voltage  
1. Remove the drive motor end cap  
and the tach cover plate from the  
end of the wire drive motor.  
board. Codes below 8300 only.  
Check to make sure the slotted  
disc is secure and aligned and  
rotates freely through the center  
of the module pick-up.  
2. Check for loose or faulty connec-  
tions on leads #510A, #525A and  
#555 between the tach receptacle  
and the control board.  
2. Perform the Tach Board  
Feedback Test.  
3. Check the tach cable from the  
tach board to the tach receptacle. 3. If the Tach Board Feedback  
The shield in the cable should  
NOT be grounded to the case.  
Test is OK the control board may  
be faulty. Replace.  
1. Check the voltage sensing leads  
for continuity. (zero ohms). #21  
should have continuity to the  
The set volts and actual volts read- 1. Put the Lincoln power source in  
ings match within a few tenths of a  
volt while welding. However both  
readings are inaccurate.  
the machine control mode.  
Check to see if the power supply  
can be set for the arc voltage  
required for the process. If not,  
the power source may be faulty.  
work piece and #67 should have  
continuity to the wire feed head  
assembly. See wiring diagram.  
2. Perform the Voltmeter Accuracy  
2. The control cable may be faulty.  
Check or replace.  
Test.  
3. Perform the Meter Circuit  
Accuracy Test.  
4. The voltage board may be faulty.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-27  
F-27  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
FUNCTION PROBLEMS  
The actual volts reading does NOT 1. NA-5 units with a G1556-2 (or  
1. If the actual reading is the prob-  
lem check the actual volts switch  
and associated leads. See wiring  
diagram.  
match the set volts reading within a  
few tenths of a volt. One reading  
may be erratic. The NA-5 does not  
shut off.  
higher) voltage board do not con-  
trol the actual strike voltage to  
match the set strike voltage. The  
actual strike voltage is a function  
of the set strike voltage and the  
OCV contrtol characteristics of  
the welding power source.  
2. If the set reading is the problem  
check the set volts switch and the  
asociated leads. See wiring dia-  
gram.  
NA-5 controls with a G1556-3 (or  
higher) voltage board must have 3. Perform the Voltmeter Accuracy  
the jumper plug connected to the  
4-cavity receptacle on the board,  
unless the pulsed power filter  
board option is connected.  
Test  
4. Perform the Meter Circuit  
Accuraty Test.  
2. Make sure the shutdown  
“BYPASS” pins are not jumpered  
together on the NA-5 voltage  
board.  
5. The voltage board may be faulty.  
3. Check the voltage sensing leads  
for continuity. (zero ohms). #21  
lead should have continuity to the  
work piece and #67 lead should  
have continuity to the wire feed  
head assembly. See wiring dia-  
gram.  
4. Put the Lincoln welding power  
source in the machine control  
mode. Check to see if the power  
supply can be set for the arc volt-  
age required for the process. If  
not, the power supply may be  
faulty.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-28  
F-28  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
FUNCTION PROBLEMS  
The NA-5 repeatedly shutsdown  
while welding.  
1. Make sure the power source  
polarity switch is set for the cor-  
rect electrode polarity.  
1. Perform the Out of Voltage  
Range Shutdown Test.  
2. The voltage board may be faulty.  
2. Make sure the #67 and #21 leads  
are connected to the TS1 termi-  
nal strip for the correct electrode  
polarity. See wiring diagram.  
3. Make certain the voltage control  
switch on the Lincoln CV power  
source is set in the “Remote”  
position.  
4. Make sure the #21 lead has con-  
tinuity (zero ohms) to the work  
piece.  
5. Make sure the #67 lead has con-  
tinuity (zero ohms) to the wire  
feed head assembly.  
6. Check the 1/8 amp fuse on the  
NA-5 voltage board. Replace if  
faulty.  
7. The control cable may be faulty.  
Check or replace.  
8. Be sure the welding power  
source is compatable with the  
NA-5.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-29  
F-29  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
FUNCTION PROBLEMS  
The circuit breaker trips when the  
inch up, inch down, or start buttons  
are pressed.  
1. The power board may be faulty. 1. Perform the Wire Drive Motor  
Replace.  
Test.  
2. Perform the DC Power Supply  
Test.  
The circuit breaker trips and or the  
fuse (F101) blows when the NA-5 is  
turned on. (input power applied).  
1. Contact your Local Lincoln  
1. If fuse F101 or the circuit breaker-  
immediately fails when input  
power is applied, unplug all of  
the PC boards except the power  
board. If the fuse still fails the  
power board may be faulty. If  
the fuse does not fail reconnect  
the PC boards one at a time until  
the faulty board is located. Also  
check and inspect the wiring har-  
ness for “short” or “grounds”.  
Reconnect the PC boards in the  
following order: control,  
Authorized Field Service Facility.  
voltage,logic,procedure,option-  
timer, remote interface,speedme-  
ter and voltmeter.  
NOTE: Some of the above PC  
boards are optional and may not  
be used in all NA-5 control units.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-30  
F-30  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
FUNCTION PROBLEMS  
The circuit breaker trips after the  
wire has been feeding for a period of  
time. Welding is normal.  
1. Check to make sure there are not 1. Perform the DC Power Supply  
any mechanical restrictions in the  
wire feeding path which could  
cause excessive loading on the  
wire drive motor.  
Test.  
2. Perform the Wire Drive Motor  
Test.  
3. The power board may be faulty.  
The 1/8 amp fuse on the voltage  
board repeatedly fails.  
1. Check to make sure the PC  
boards are NOT grounded to the  
case of the NA-5. This can hap-  
pen due to metallic dust build-up.  
1. Remove the input power to the  
NA-5 and replace the 1/8 amp  
fuse. Locate and remove the #21  
and #67 leads from the TS1 ter-  
minal strip.  
A. Make a resistance check  
from the following leads  
to the NA-5 case ground-  
ing screw. Lead #510A,  
510P, 500, 515 and 525.  
B. The resistances should  
be above 1000 ohms. If  
any tests are below 1000  
ohms that circuit has low  
resistance to case  
ground. Isolate faulty  
leads or PC board. See  
wiring diagram and  
schematic.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-31  
F-31  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
STARTING/WELDING PROBLEMS  
The arc voltage appears to rise too 1. Increase the strike and or start  
1. The voltage board may be faulty.  
Replace.  
slowly. The wire stubs or blasts off  
at the start of the weld sequence.  
voltage settings.  
Once the arc is established the weld- 2. Put the output control switch (on  
ing is OK.  
the power source) in the  
“Machine Control” position.  
Jumper the “BYPASS “ pins on  
the NA-5 voltage board. Control  
the arc voltage from the power  
source. If the problem is NOT  
remedied the power source may  
be at fault. If the problem is  
solved the NA-5 may be at fault.  
3. If the start response jumper, on  
the voltage board, is in the “B”  
position, change to the “A” posi-  
tion. If the “A” position cures the  
starting problem the voltage  
board may be faulty.  
The voltage seems too high or flares 1. Decrease the strike and or start 1. The voltage board may be faulty.  
excessively at the start of the weld  
sequence. Once the arc is estab-  
lished the welding is OK.  
voltage settings.  
Replace.  
2. Put the output control switch (on  
the power source) in the  
“Machine Control” position.  
Jumper the “BYPASS” pins on  
the voltage board. Control the  
arc voltage from the power  
source. If the problem is NOT  
remedied the power source may  
be at fault. If the problem is  
solved the NA-5 may be at fault.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-32  
F-32  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
WELDING PROBLEMS  
The arc is unstable or oscillating.  
1. Check the welding cables for  
loose or faulty connections.  
1. The NA-5 voltage board may be  
faulty. Replace.  
2. Make sure the electrode and gas  
(if used) is correct for the process  
being used.  
3. Put the output control switch (on  
the power source) in the  
“Machine Control” position.  
Jumper the “BYPASS “ pins on  
the NA-5 voltage board. Control  
the arc voltage from the power  
source. If the problem is NOT  
remedied the power source may  
be at fault. If the problem is  
solved the NA-5 may be at fault.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-33  
F-33  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
FUNCTION PROBLEMS  
The flux or gas/water solenoid does 1. Make sure the switch on the flux 1. If light 7G, located on the logic  
not function (open).  
hopper is in the ON position.  
board, does light when the flux  
(gas/water) solenoid is normally  
active, check the CR1 relay.  
Normal coil resistance is 10,000  
ohms. The contacts (terminals 2  
and 4) should “close” when  
2. Check light 7G located on the  
logic board. This light should be  
on when the flux valve would nor-  
mally be active. If light 7G does  
not light the logic board may be  
faulty.  
110VDC is applied to the relay coil  
(terminals 1 + and 3 -).  
2. Check the wiring harness for  
loose or faulty connections  
between the CR1 relay, the logic  
board, the TS2 terminal strip and  
the flux receptacle. See wiring  
diagram.  
The flux or gas/water solenoid con- 1. Check light 7G located on the  
1. Check the CR1 relay. The con-  
tacts (terminal 2 and 4) should  
“close” only when 110VDC is  
applied to the relay coil. (termi-  
nals 1+ and 3-). If the contacts  
are “closed” continuously replace  
the CR1 relay.  
tinuously remains open.  
logic board. This light should be  
lit only when the flux valve would  
normally be active. If light 7G is  
lit continuously the logic board  
may be faulty.  
2. Check to make sure the solenoid  
is not stuck in the open position.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-34  
F-34  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
WELDING PROBLEMS  
The arc is unstable or oscillating.  
1. Check the welding cables for  
loose or faulty connections.  
1. The NA-5 voltage board may be  
faulty Replace.  
2. Make sure the electrode and gas  
(if used) is correct for the process  
being used.  
3. Put the Lincoln power source in  
the machine control  
mode.Jumper the “BYPASS” pins  
on the NA-5 voltage board.  
Adjust the weld voltage at the  
power source for the process  
being used. If the problem is  
NOT resolved the power source  
may be faulty.  
The welding arc is variable or “hunt- 1. Make sure the welding parame- 1. Put the Lincoln power source in  
ing”.  
ters are correct for the welding  
procedure being used.  
the machine control mode.  
Jumper the “BYPASS” pins on the  
NA-5 voltage board. Adjust the  
weld voltage at the power source  
for the process being used. If the  
problem is resolved check or  
replace the control cable or the  
NA-5 voltage board may be faulty.  
2. Check the welding cables for-  
loose or faulty connections.  
3. Check the wire feeding path for  
restrictions.  
4. The contact tip may be worn.  
Check or replace.  
2. Perform the Wire Drive Motor  
Test.  
5. The welding power source may  
be faulty. Check or replace.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-35  
F-35  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
Observe all Safety Guidelines detailed throughout this manual  
PROBLEMS  
(SYMPTOMS)  
POSSIBLE AREAS OF  
MISADJUSTMENTS(S)  
RECOMMENDED  
COURSE OF ACTION  
WELDING PROBLEMS  
Poor arc striking with sticking or  
“blast offs”. The weld bead is ropey  
and has porosity.  
1. Make sure the welding parame- 1. Put the Lincoln power source in  
ters (voltages and wire feed  
speed) and techniques are cor-  
rect for the welding procedure  
being used.  
the machine control mode.  
Jumper the “BYPASS” pins on the  
NA-5 voltage board. Adjust the  
weld voltage at the power source  
for the process being used. If the  
problem is resolved check or  
replace the control cable or the  
NA-5 voltage board may be faulty.  
2. Check the welding cables for  
loose or faulty connections.  
3. The contact tip may be worn.  
Check or replace.  
4. The welding power source may  
be faulty. Check or replace.  
CAUTION  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric  
Service Department for technical troubleshooting assistance before you proceed. Call 216-383-2531 or 1-800-833-9353.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-36  
F-36  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
PC BOARD LED (LIGHT) DEFINITIONS  
LED Number  
Functions Indicated By PC Board LEDS  
1A  
1B  
1C  
1D  
1E  
1F  
+15VDC Analog Supply Present  
-10VDC Analog Supply Present  
Down Field Voltage Applied  
Up Field Voltage Applied  
Armature Voltage Applied  
115VDC Relay Supply Present  
7A  
7B  
7C  
7D  
7E  
7G  
7H  
7J  
+15VDC Logic Supply Present  
"Start" Switch Pressed  
"Stop" Switch Pressed  
Welding Current Present  
Signal to Apply Down Field Voltage  
Signal to Operate Flux or Water Solenoid  
Signal to Operate Travel Circuit  
"Inch Down" Switch Pressed  
7K  
Signal to Operate Power Source Output Contactor  
LED LIGHT LOCATIONS  
LED LIGHT LOCATIONS  
NA-5 LOGIC  
LED 1E  
LED 7E  
LED 7B  
LED 1C  
LED 1D  
LED 7J  
LED 7C  
LED 7D  
LED 1A  
LED 1B  
LED7A  
LED 1F  
LED 7K  
LED 7H  
LED 7G  
NA-5  
POWER  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-37  
F-37  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
PC BOARD LED (LIGHT) SEQUENCE TABLE ABOVE CODE 8300  
INDICATOR LIGHTS  
CONDITIONS FOR LIGHT "ON"  
Light  
No.  
Location  
(PC Board)  
Idle  
Mode  
"Inch Up" "Inch Down" "Start"  
"Stop"  
Switch  
Burnback Weld Arc  
Switch  
Switch  
Switch  
Mode  
Establish  
Pressed  
Pressed  
Pressed  
Pressed  
1A  
1B  
1C  
1D  
1E  
1F  
Power  
Power  
Power  
Power  
Power  
Power  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON*  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
7A  
7B  
7C  
7D  
7E  
7G  
7H  
7J  
Logic  
Logic  
Logic  
Logic  
Logic  
Logic  
Logic  
Logic  
Logic  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON*  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON*  
ON  
ON  
ON**  
ON**  
ON  
ON*  
7K  
ON  
ON  
ON* only while switch is pressed  
ON** dependent on travel mode  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-38  
F-38  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
DC POWER SUPPLY TEST  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained per-  
sonnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to  
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For  
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precau-  
tions detailed throughout this manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform  
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.  
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).  
_____________________________________________________________  
TEST DESCRIPTION  
This will help determine if the power and logic boards are supplying the correct DC voltages  
to the NA-5 circuitry.  
This procedure takes approximately 16 minutes to perform.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
5/16" Nutdriver  
Volt/Ohmmeter (Multimeter)  
Wiring diagram  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-39  
F-39  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
DC POWER SUPPLY TEST (continued)  
TEST PROCEDURE  
1. Remove input power to the NA-5.  
5. Perform the power supply checks as  
described in Table F.1 If any of the  
readings are incorrect (out of range)  
or missing the power or logic board  
may be faulty. See wiring diagram.  
Note: Do not unplug the molex con-  
nectors.  
2. Using the 5/16" nutdriver open the  
control box PC board access door.  
3. Locate the power, logic, voltage,  
control and procedure boards. See  
Figure F.1  
Also check associated leads and  
plugs for loose or faulty connec-  
tions.  
4. Apply 115VAC to the NA-5 wire  
feeder at the correct pins. See  
wiring diagram.  
POWER  
BOARD  
VOLTAGE  
BOARD  
LOGIC  
BOARD  
CONTROL  
BOARD  
PROCEDURE  
BOARD  
FIGURE F.1 P.C. BOARD LOCATIONS  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-40  
F-40  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
DC POWER SUPPLY TEST (continued)  
TABLE F.1 DC POWER SUPPLY CHECKS  
CHECK POINT  
LOCATION  
TEST  
DESCRIPTION  
CONNECTOR  
PLUG PIN NO.  
LEAD NO.  
NORMAL  
ACCEPTABLE  
VOLTAGE  
READING  
CONTROL PC  
BOARD  
CONNECTOR  
PLUG  
CHECK +15VDC  
SUPPLY FROM  
POWER BOARD  
TO  
PIN 10 +  
PIN 9 -  
525 +  
510 -  
14.0 - 16.0 VDC  
14.0 - 16.0 VDC  
9.0 - 11.0 VDC  
9.0 - 11.0 VDC  
90 - 135 VDC  
510 -  
CONTROL BOARD  
525 +  
VOLTAGE PC  
BOARD 12 PIN  
CONNECTOR  
PLUG  
CHECK +15VDC  
SUPPLY FROM  
POWER BOARD  
TO  
PIN 3 +  
PIN 7 -  
525 +  
510 -  
VOLTAGE BOARD  
510 -  
525 +  
VOLTAGE PC  
BOARD 12 PIN  
CONNECTOR  
PLUG  
CHECK -10VDC  
SUPPLY FROM  
POWER BOARD  
TO  
PIN 6 -  
PIN 7+  
500 -  
510 +  
VOLTAGE BOARD  
510 +  
500 -  
CONTROL PC  
BOARD  
CONNECTOR  
PLUG  
CHECK -10VDC  
SUPPLY FROM  
POWER BOARD  
TO  
PIN 14 -  
PIN 9 +  
500 -  
510 +  
510 +  
CONTROL BOARD  
500 -  
LOGIC PC  
BOARD J1  
CONNECTOR  
PLUG  
CHECK +110VDC  
SUPPLY FROM  
POWER BOARD  
TO  
PLUG J1 PIN 1+  
PLUG J1 PIN 2 -  
610 +  
500 -  
610 +  
500 -  
LOGIC BOARD  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-41  
F-41  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
DC POWER SUPPLY TEST (continued)  
TABLE F.1 DC POWER SUPPLY CHECKS (continued)  
CHECK POINT  
LOCATION  
TEST  
DESCRIPTION  
CONNECTOR  
PLUG PIN NO.  
LEAD NO.  
NORMAL  
ACCEPTABLE  
VOLTAGE  
READING  
PROCEDURE  
PC BOARD  
J19 CONNECTOR  
PLUG  
CHECK +15VDC  
SUPPLY FROM  
LOGIC BOARD  
TO  
PLUG J19  
PIN 5 +  
515 +  
500 -  
14.0 - 16.0 VDC  
PLUG J19  
PIN 15 -  
PROCEDURE BOARD  
515 +  
500 -  
VOLTMETER  
BOARD  
CHECK +5VDC  
SUPPLY  
TEST POINT1.  
TP5 +  
TP5 +  
PRODUCED  
ON THE  
VOLTMETER  
BOARD  
4.75 - 5.25 VDC  
TEST POINT1.  
510P -  
LEAD 510P -  
SPEEDMETER  
BOARD  
CHECK +5VDC  
SUPPLY  
TEST POINT1.  
TP5 +  
TP5 +  
4.75 - 5.25 VDC  
PRODUCED  
ON THE  
SPEEDMETER  
BOARD  
TEST POINT1.  
510P -  
LEAD 510P -  
1.Scrape encapsulation from test points.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-42  
F-42  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
T1 and T2 TRANSFORMER TEST  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained per-  
sonnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to  
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For  
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precau-  
tions detailed throughout this manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform  
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.  
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).  
_____________________________________________________________  
TEST DESCRIPTION  
This test will help the technician to determine if the T1 and/or T2 transformers are functioning  
properly.  
This procedure takes approximately 15 minutes to perform.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
115VAC power supply  
Volt-Ohmmeter (Multimeter)  
5/16" Nutdriver  
Slot head screwdriver  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-43  
F-43  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
T1 and T2 TRANSFORMER TEST (Continued)  
5. Using the 115VAC supply carefully  
PROCEDURE  
apply 115VAC to the T1 primary  
leads #531B and #532.  
1. Remove all input power to the NA-5.  
6. Check for approximately 10VAC at  
the yellow secondary leads (#601  
and #602). See wiring diagram.  
2. Using 5/16" nutdriver open the con-  
trol box PC board access door.  
3. Locate the T1 and T2 transformers.  
See Figure F.2  
4. Locate and remove the two sets of  
primary leads (#531B and #532)  
from the upper terminal strip TS2.  
Label leads for reassembly. See  
wiring diagram and Figure F.2  
POWER  
BOARD  
UPPER  
TERMINAL  
STRIP  
LOGIC  
BOARD  
T1 TRANSFORMER  
T2 TRANSFORMER  
FIGURE F.2 T1 AND T2 TRANSFORMERS  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-44  
F-44  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
T1 and T2 TRANSFORMER TEST (Continued)  
7. Check for approximately 22VAC at  
the blue secondary leads. The blue  
secondary leads are connected to  
the logic board. See wiring diagram.  
13. Check for approximately 115VAC  
at the orange secondary leads.  
The orange leads are connected to  
the power board. See wiring dia-  
gram.  
8. Check for approximately 18VAC at  
the white to red leads. The white  
and red leads are connected to the  
power board. See wiring diagram.  
14. Check for approximately 24VAC at  
the brown secondary leads. See  
wiring diagram.  
9. Check for approximately 36VAC at  
the red to red leads. Both red leads  
are also connected to the power  
board. See wiring diagram.  
15. If all the secondary voltages are  
correct the T2 transformer is func-  
tioning properly.  
16. If any or all of the secondary volt-  
ages are low or not present the T2  
transformer may be faulty.  
10. If all the secondary voltages are  
correct the T1 transformer is func-  
tioning properly.  
17. Reconnect the primary leads  
(#531B and #532) to the TS2 termi-  
nal strip.  
11. If any or all of the secondary volt-  
ages are low or not present the T1  
transformer may be faulty.  
18. Close and secure the access door.  
12. Using the 115VAC supply carefully  
apply 115VAC to the T2 primary  
leads #531B and #532.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-45  
F-45  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
VOLTAGE BOARD TRANSFORMER TEST  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained per-  
sonnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to  
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For  
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precau-  
tions detailed throughout this manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform  
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.  
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).  
_____________________________________________________________  
TEST DESCRIPTION  
This test will aid the technician in determining if the transformer on the voltage board is func-  
tioning properly.  
This procedure takes approximately 15 minutes to perform.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
5/16" Nutdriver  
Phillips head screwdriver  
115VAC power supply  
Volt/Ohmmeter  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-46  
F-46  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
VOLTAGE BOARD TRANSFORMER TEST (Continued)  
4. Remove the molex type plugs from  
TEST PROCEDURE  
the voltage board.  
1. Remove all input power to the NA-5.  
5. Using the phillips head screwdriver  
remove the voltage board from the  
control box.  
2. Using the 5/16" nutdriver open the  
control box PC board access door.  
6. Locate the transformer and test  
points on the voltage board. See  
Figure F.4  
3. Locate the voltage board. See  
Figure F.3  
VOLTAGE  
BOARD  
FIGURE F.3 VOLTAGE BOARD LOCATION  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-47  
F-47  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
VOLTAGE BOARD TRANSFORMER TEST (Continued)  
24VAC  
SECONDARY  
TEST POINTS  
{
PIN #9  
PIN #8  
VOLTAGE BOARD  
TRANSFORMER  
FIGURE F.4 TRANSFORMER TEST POINTS  
7. Using the 115VAC supply carefully  
apply 115VAC to pins #8 and #9 in  
the nine pin molex plug cavity on the  
voltage board. See Figure F.4  
Make sure the board and leads are  
insulated from each other and any  
metal conductors.  
10. If the secondary voltage is low or  
not present the transformer may be  
faulty.  
11. Carefully remove the 115VAC sup-  
ply from the voltage board.  
12. Install the voltage board and con-  
nect the molex plugs.  
8. Using the voltmeter check for  
approximately 24VAC at the sec-  
ondary test points. See Figure F.4  
13. Close and secure the access door.  
Note: The secondary voltage will vary  
with the input primary voltage. The  
insulating material will have to be  
removed from the secondary test  
points to insure that the meter probes  
make good electrical contact.  
9. If the secondary voltage is correct  
the transformer is functioning proper-  
ly.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-48  
F-48  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
WIRE FEED DRIVE MOTOR TEST  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained per-  
sonnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to  
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For  
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precau-  
tions detailed throughout this manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform  
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.  
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).  
_____________________________________________________________  
TEST DESCRIPTION  
This test will determine if the wire drive motor is able to function when supplied with the cor-  
rect voltages..  
This procedure takes approximately 17 minutes to perform.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
Variable DC voltage supply 0 to 90 VDC  
Isolated DC voltage supply 0 to 120 VDC  
Volt/Ohmeter  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-49  
F-49  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
WIRE FEED DRIVE MOTOR TEST (Continued)  
TEST PROCEDURE  
MOTOR APPLIED  
VOLTAGE TEST  
1. Remove the wire feed motor connec-  
tor from the NA-5 control box.  
1. Carefully connect the isolated 120  
VDC supply (SUPPLY TURNED  
OFF) to pins C and D on the motor  
connector.  
2. Using the ohmmeter, measure the  
resistances per the table below. Also  
see Figure F.5.  
2. Carefully connect the variable 0 to 90  
VDC supply (SUPPLY TURNED  
OFF) to pins A and B on the motor  
connector. (See Table F.1.)  
3. If the motor resistance test is good,  
proceed to the Motor Applied Voltage  
Test.  
3. Apply field voltage first (pins C and  
D) to the motor. Then, slowly apply  
the armature voltage to pins A and B.  
(See Table F.1).  
FIGURE F.5 WIRE FEED DRIVE MOTOR  
CONNECTOR PINS.  
MOTOR  
CONNECTOR  
PINS  
4. The motor should run, and the speed  
should vary with changes to the  
armature voltage.  
#67  
#541  
#539  
F
5. If the motor does NOT run and  
change speed correctly, the motor or  
gear box may be faulty.  
E
A
B
D
C
6. To stop the motor, REMOVE THE  
ARMATURE VOLTAGE FIRST (pins  
A and B).  
#627  
#626  
TEST POINTS  
RESISTANCE  
DC VOLTAGE  
0 to 90 VDC  
Lead #539 to lead #541  
armature  
4 to 5 ohms  
Lead #626 to lead #627  
field winding  
750 to 850 ohms  
90 to 120 VDC  
NONE  
All leads  
to  
500,000 ohms  
min.  
motor shell  
(Except lead #67)  
Lead #67 to motor  
shell  
zero ohms  
Not Applicable  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-50  
F-50  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
EXTERNAL RESISTANCE TEST (LEADS #21 AND #67)  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained per-  
sonnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to  
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For  
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precau-  
tions detailed throughout this manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform  
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.  
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).  
_____________________________________________________________  
TEST DESCRIPTION  
This test will help the technician to determine if the external voltage sensing leads are con-  
nected properly and intact.  
This procedure takes approximately 8 minutes to perform.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
Volt-Ohmmeter (Multimeter)  
5/16" Nutdriver  
3/4" wrench  
Wiring diagram  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-51  
F-51  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
EXTERNAL RESISTANCE TEST (LEADS #21 AND #67) (Continued)  
PROCEDURE  
1. Make sure the electrode wire is fed  
through the wire contact assembly  
tip but NOT touching the "work"  
piece.  
6. Using the ohmmeter check the resis-  
tances per the following table F.2  
7. Reconnect the welding cable leads  
to the contact assembly.  
2. Disconnect input power to the NA-5.  
8. If any of the resistances are not cor-  
rect per Table F.2 check the associ-  
ated leads, cables and circuits for  
"opens" or "shorts". See wiring dia-  
gram.  
3. Make sure the drive motor cable and  
power source control cables are  
properly connected to the NA-5 con-  
trol box.  
4. Using the 5/16" nutdriver open the  
control box PC board access door.  
9. Close and secure the control box  
access door.  
5. Locate the TS1 terminal strip. See  
wiring diagram.  
TABLE F.2 EXTERNAL VOLTAGE SENSING LEADS TEST POINTS  
TEST POINTS  
EXPECTED  
RESISTANCES  
COMMENTS AND  
CONDITIONS  
Lead #667  
to  
Zero or less than  
1 ohm  
Electrode wire must be in  
contact assembly tip  
Electrode wire  
Lead #621 to  
work piece  
Zero or less than  
1 ohm  
Polarity switches must be  
in the correct positions  
Lead #667 to  
#621  
Greater than 15K  
ohms  
Using the 3/4" wrench  
disconnect the welding  
cable(s) from the  
contact assembly  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-52  
F-52  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
OUT OF VOLTAGE RANGE SHUT DOWN TEST  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained per-  
sonnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to  
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For  
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precau-  
tions detailed throughout this manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform  
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.  
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).  
_____________________________________________________________  
TEST DESCRIPTION  
This test will help determine if the out-of-voltage range shut down circuitry is functioning prop-  
erly.  
This procedure takes approximately 18 minutes to perform.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
5/16" Nutdriver  
Jumper wire  
Lincoln CV Power Source  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-53  
F-53  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
OUT OF VOLTAGE RANGE SHUT DOWN TEST (Continued)  
TEST PROCEDURE  
4. Connect to a Lincoln Electric CV  
power source per connection dia-  
gram. See the Installation section  
of this manual.  
1. Remove input power to the NA-5  
2. Using the 5/16" nutdriver open the  
control box PC board access door.  
3. Locate the voltage PC board.  
Jumper together the "BYPASS" and  
“Common” pins on the NA-5 voltage  
PC board. See Figure F.6 (On older  
voltage boards these pins may be  
labeled "B"). This should disable the  
shut down circuit.  
1/8 AMP FUSE  
JUMPER  
TOGETHER  
FIGURE F.6 VOLTAGE BOARD AND PIN LOCATIONS  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-54  
F-54  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
OUT OF VOLTAGE RANGE SHUT DOWN TEST (Continued)  
5. Start welding and observe the  
ACTUAL voltage reading on the NA-  
5 digital meter. The actual voltage  
must match the SET voltage within  
+/- 0.5VDC. If it does NOT, the NA-  
5 is designed to shut down.  
9. If the ACTUAL voltage reading is dif-  
ferent from the SET voltage reading,  
the power source may not be capa-  
ble of producing the required arc  
voltage, the control cable may be  
faulty or misconnected, or the NA-5  
voltage PC board may be faulty.  
6. If the NA-5 continues to shut down  
with the "BYPASS" pins jumpered  
together, the voltage PC board may  
be faulty.  
10. After all tests are complete, remove  
the input power to the wire feeder  
and remove the jumper wire you  
placed on the "BYPASS' pins on  
the voltage PC board. Close and  
secure the access door.  
7. If the ACTUAL voltage reading is  
zero, the sensing leads may be  
faulty.  
Perform the External  
Resistance Test. Also check the  
1/8 amp fuse on the voltage PC  
board.  
8. Check the polarity switche in the  
Lincoln power source and its associ-  
ated leads. Set the switches to the  
same polarity as the electrode. See  
the Wiring Diagram.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-55  
F-55  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
TACH BOARD FEEDBACK TEST  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained per-  
sonnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to  
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For  
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precau-  
tions detailed throughout this manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform  
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.  
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).  
_____________________________________________________________  
TEST DESCRIPTION  
This procedure will aid the technician to determine if the tach board is functioning properly.  
This procedure takes approximately 10 minutes to perform.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
5/16" Nutdriver  
Phillips head screwdriver  
Analog volt/ohmmeter (Multimeter)  
Wiring diagram  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-56  
F-56  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
TACH BOARD FEEDBACK TEST (Continued)  
PROCEDURE  
between 4.5 - 10.5VDC. (The motor  
1. Remove input power to the NA-5.  
must be running.) This is the feed-  
back voltage from the tach PC board  
to the control PC board. This volt-  
age is dependent upon motor speed.  
2. Using the 5/16" nutdriver open the  
control box PC board access door.  
3. Locate leads #510A, #525A and  
#555 on the control board.  
7. If the feedback voltage is missing or  
does not vary with motor speed, the  
tach PC board may be faulty. Also  
check for loose or faulty connec-  
tions.  
4. Apply 115VAC to the NA-5 wire  
feeder at the correct pins. See  
wiring diagram.  
8. After the completion of the tests  
remove the 115VAC power and  
close and secure the access door.  
5. Check leads #525A(+) to #510A(-)  
for the presence of 15VDC. This is  
the supply voltage from the control  
PC board to the tach PC board. If  
the voltage is present, proceed to  
the next step. If the voltage is miss-  
ing check the associated wiring and  
then perform the DC Power Supply  
Test.  
6. With the motor running (activate  
either inch switches or the start  
switch) and check leads #555(+) to  
#510A(-) for the presence of  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-57  
F-57  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
VOLTMETER ACCURACY TEST  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained per-  
sonnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to  
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For  
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precau-  
tions detailed throughout this manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform  
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.  
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).  
_____________________________________________________________  
TEST DESCRIPTION  
This test will help determine if the NA-5 voltmeter is providing accurate readings.  
This procedure takes approximately 10 minutes to perform.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
Digital volt/ohmmeter with at least 3-1/2 digits and +/-0.5% accuracy  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-58  
F-58  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
VOLTMETER ACCURACY TEST (Continued)  
TEST PROCEDURE  
Perform the following checks with the  
NA-5 connected to a Lincoln CV weld-  
ing power source according to the prop-  
er connection diagram. See the  
Installation Section of this manual.  
3. Place a jumper wire between leads  
#2 and #4 located on CR3 relay.  
See Figure F.8 This this should  
energize the output terminals of the  
Lincoln CV welding power source.  
An open circuit voltage should be  
present at the welding output termi-  
nals. The test voltmeter reading  
should match the ACTUAL volts  
meter reading on the NA-5 within +/-  
0.5VDC (typically +/- 0.2VDC). If it  
does not, check the integrity and  
1. Connect the test voltmeter (see  
Materials Needed) between the  
"work" and the electrode cable con-  
nection at the welding head. See  
Figure F.7  
2. Using the 5/16" nutdriver open the  
control box PC board access door.  
placement  
of  
the  
voltage  
sensing leads #21 and #67 and  
associated wiring. Perform the  
Meter Circuit Accuracy Test.  
ELECTRODE CABLES  
CONNECT VOLTMETER  
TO ELECTRODE  
CONNECTION  
POINT  
FIGURE F.7 TEST METER CONNECTION POINTS  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-59  
F-59  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
VOLTMETER ACCURACY TEST (Continued)  
CR3 RELAY  
FIGURE F.8 CR3 RELAY  
4. Remove the jumper wire from leads  
#2 and #4.  
5. Remove the test voltmeter and,  
while welding, compare the SET  
volts and ACTUAL volts meter read-  
ings. Depending upon the arc volt-  
age characteristics of the process  
being welded, the ACTUAL reading  
may vary somewhat about an aver-  
age value. The average ACTUAL  
reading should match the SET read-  
ing within +/- 0.5 VDC. If not, refer  
to the Meter Circuit Accuracy Test.  
6. If no further tests are required,  
remove all test equipment and close  
and secure the access door.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-60  
F-60  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
WIRE SPEED ACCURACY TEST  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained per-  
sonnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to  
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For  
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precau-  
tions detailed throughout this manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform  
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.  
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).  
_____________________________________________________________  
TEST DESCRIPTION  
This test will help determine if the NA-5 is providing the proper wire feed per inches of revolu-  
tion of the drive roll.  
This procedure takes approximately 20 minutes to perform.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
Ruler or other linear measuring device  
5/16" Nutdriver  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-61  
F-61  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
WIRE SPEED ACCURACY TEST (Continued)  
TEST PROCEDURE  
Perform the following checks with the  
NA-5 connected to a Lincoln CV weld-  
ing power source according to the prop-  
er connection diagram. See the  
Installation Section of this manual.  
1. Check to make sure the speedmeter  
calibration jumper is connected to  
the proper calibration pin for the  
head and drive roll system being  
used. See Table F.3  
TABLE F.3  
SPEEDMETER  
CALIBRATION  
HEAD  
RATIO  
DRIVE ROLL  
PART NUMBER  
WIRE SIZE RANGE  
RATED SPEED  
RANGE (IPM)  
21*  
21/1  
S12778  
S19113  
Single .035 - .052 Solid  
Single .045 - .052 Cored  
100 - 2070  
57F**  
57**  
57/1  
57/1  
S12778  
S12515  
Single .035 - .052  
Single 1/16 - 3/32  
40 - 778  
38 - 762  
95  
95/1  
95/1  
S12514  
Single 3/32 - 5/32  
22 - 428  
23 - 456  
95S***  
S12515  
S19113  
S13161-052  
S13161-5/64  
S14904 (Outer)  
S14905 (Inner)  
Single 1/16 - 3/32  
Single .045 - .052 Cored  
Twin .045 -.052  
Twin 1/16 - 5/64  
Twin 3/32  
142  
142/1  
142/1  
S12514  
Single 3/32 - 7/32  
Twin 5/64 - 1/8  
15 - 289  
15 - 300  
142T***  
S14904 (Outer)  
S14905 (Inner)  
* Present on HI -Speed NA-5 speedmeter board only. ** Early speedmeter pins were labeled 55F and 55,  
respectively.  
*** Early speedmeter PC boards did not include these calibration pins.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-62  
F-62  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
WIRE SPEED ACCURACY TEST (Continued)  
2. Check for the proper wire feed inch-  
es per revolution of the drive roll.  
A. Set the Strike speed control to  
any setting between 50 and 125  
IPM. While pressing the INCH  
DOWN button measure the pre-  
cise length of wire fed by exactly  
10 revolutions of the drive roll.  
The measured length should be  
within the range specified in  
Table F.4 for the drive roll and  
wire size employed.  
B. If the measured length is not  
within the specified lengths  
there may be a problem with the  
wire or wire feeding path. See  
the Troubleshooting Guide  
(Feeding Problems) in this sec-  
tion of the manual. Also check  
for correct drive roll tension  
adjustment.  
TABLE F.4  
DRIVE ROLL PART  
WIRE SIZE RANGE  
INCHES OF WIRE FED PER  
10 REVOLUTIONS OF  
DRIVE ROLL  
NUMBER  
S12778  
S19113  
Single .035 - .052 Solid  
Single .045 - .052 Cored  
Single 1/16 - 3/32  
Single 3/32 - 5/32  
Twin .045 - .052  
53 - 54  
53 - 55  
51 - 53  
49 - 51  
53 - 55  
53 - 55  
51 - 52  
S12515  
S12514  
S13161-052  
S13161-5/64  
Twin 1/16 - 5/64  
S14904 (Outer)  
S14905 (Inner)  
Twin 3/32  
S12514  
Single 3/32 - 7/32  
Twin 5/64 - 1/8  
49 - 52  
51 - 53  
S14904 (Outer)  
S14905 (Inner)  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-63  
F-63  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
WIRE SPEED ACCURACY TEST (Continued)  
3. Check for the proper drive roll revo-  
lutions per minute. (RPM)  
B. If the readings do not match the  
number in Table F.5 refer to the  
A. Adjust the STRIKE speed con-  
trol to obtain the SET speed  
specified for the speedmeter  
calibration pin and head ratio  
specified per Table F.5 While  
pressing the INCH down button  
count the drive roll revolutions in  
60 seconds. The drive roll revo-  
lutions and actual speed reading  
should match Table F.5  
Meter Circuit Accuracy Test.  
TABLE F.5  
SPEEDMETER  
CALIBRATION  
PIN  
HEAD  
RATIO  
SET SPEEDMETER  
READING (IPM)  
READING (IPM)  
DRIVE ROLL  
RPM  
ACTUAL  
SPEEDMETER  
21*  
21/1  
0.27 (IPM X 1000)  
50 +/- 2  
0.27 +/- 0.01  
(IPM X 1000)  
57F**  
57**  
57/1  
57/1  
268  
262  
249  
265  
250  
260  
50 +/- 1  
50 +/- 1  
50 +/- 1  
50 +/- 1  
50 +/- 1  
50 +/- 1  
268 +/- 2  
262 +/- 2  
249 +/- 2  
265 +/- 2  
250 +/- 2  
260 +/- 2  
95  
95/1  
95S***  
142  
95/1  
142/1  
142/1  
142T***  
* Present on HI -Speed NA-5 speedmeter board only. ** Early speedmeter pins were labeled 55F and 55,  
respectively.  
*** Early speedmeter PC boards did not include these calibration pins.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-64  
F-64  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
METER CIRCUIT ACCURACY TEST  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained per-  
sonnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to  
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For  
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precau-  
tions detailed throughout this manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform  
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.  
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).  
_____________________________________________________________  
TEST DESCRIPTION  
This test will help determine if the NA-5 meter circuit is functioning properly.  
The Speed Meter Circuit tests take approximately 15 minutes to perform.  
The Volt Meter Circuit tests take approximately 15 minutes to perform.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
Digital volt/ohmmeter with at least 3-1/2 digits and +/- 0.5% accuracy  
5/16" Nutdriver  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-65  
F-65  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
METER CIRCUIT ACCURACY TEST (Continued)  
5. Test for AC supply to the volt-  
TEST PROCEDURE  
meter PC board.  
1. Remove input power to the NA-5.  
• Check for 8 to 11VAC from lead  
#601 to #602. See Figure F.9  
2. Using the 5/16" nutdriver open the  
control box PC board access door.  
Note: The coating will have to be  
removed from the test points to ensure  
accurate voltmeter readings. If the cor-  
rect AC voltage is not present check for  
loose or faulty connects with the associ-  
ated leads. See wiring diagram.  
3. Locate the voltmeter PC board. See  
Figure F.9  
4. Apply input power to the NA-5.  
517  
518  
TP4  
TP5  
601  
510C  
510  
602  
L6685-[ ] METER  
FIGURE F.9 VOLTMETER PC BOARD AND TEST POINTS  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-66  
F-66  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
METER CIRCUIT ACCURACY TEST (Continued)  
6. Test for DC volts on the voltmeter  
7. Test Digital Voltmeter Accuracy  
PC board.  
• Use a test meter with at least 3-  
1/2 digits and +/- 0.5% accuracy.  
• Check for 4.75 to 5.25VDC from  
TP5 to lead #510C. See Figure  
F.9  
• Connect the + probe to TP4 and  
the - probe to lead 510C. Do NOT  
disconnect plug.  
Note: The coating will have to be  
removed from the test points to ensure  
accurate voltmeter readings.  
Note: The coating will have to be  
removed from the test points to ensure  
accurate meter readings.  
• If the display is NOT lit and the  
correct DC voltage is present at  
TP5 to lead #510C, the digital  
meter may be faulty. Replace the  
meter.  
• With the NA-5 voltmeter reading  
SET values of STRIKE voltage,  
adjust the strike voltage control  
until the test meter matches the  
settings in the table below.  
• If the AC voltage IS present at  
leads #601 to #602 and the DC  
voltage is missing, the voltmeter  
PC board may be faulty.  
• If the NA-5 digital voltmeter does  
not match the readings, the digital  
meter may be faulty.  
NA-5 SET VOLTS READING  
TEST VOLTMETER READING  
15.0VDC  
30.0VDC  
60.0VDC  
.150 +/- .004VDC  
.300 +/- .004VDC  
.600 +/- .006 VDC  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-67  
F-67  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
METER CIRCUIT ACCURACY TEST (Continued)  
8. Test Voltmeter PC Board Accuracy  
• Use a test meter with at least 3-  
1/2 digits and +/- 0.5% accuracy.  
• Connect the + probe to lead #517  
and the - probe to lead #510C.  
Do not disconnect plug.  
Note: The coating will have to be  
removed from the test points to ensure  
accurate meter readings.  
• With the NA-5 voltmeter reading  
SET values of STRIKE voltage,  
adjust the strike voltage control  
until the NA-5 voltmeter matches  
the settings in the table below.  
• If the test meter does not match  
the readings, the voltmeter PC  
board may be faulty.  
NA-5 SET VOLTS READING  
TEST VOLTMETER READING  
15.0VDC  
30.0VDC  
60.0VDC  
1.50VDC +/- .04  
3.00VDC +/- .04  
6.00VDC +/- .06  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-68  
F-68  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
METER CIRCUIT ACCURACY TEST (Continued)  
9. Locate the speedmeter PC board.  
See Figure F.10  
12. Test for DC volts on the speed-  
meter PC board.  
10. Apply input power to the NA-5.  
• Check for 4.75 to 5.25VDC from  
TP5 to lead #510P. See Figure  
F.10  
11. Test for AC supply to the speed-  
meter PC board.  
Note: The coating will have to be  
removed from the test points to ensure  
accurate meter readings.  
• Check for 8 to 11VAC from lead  
#601 ot #602. See Figure F.10  
• If the display is NOT lit and the  
correct DC voltage is present at  
TP5 to lead #510P, the digital  
meter may be faulty. Replace the  
meter.  
• If the AC voltage IS present at  
leads #601 to #602 and the DC  
voltage is missing, the speedme-  
ter PC board may be faulty.  
Note: The coating will have to be  
removed from the test points to ensure  
accurate voltmeter readings. If the cor-  
rect AC voltage is not present check for  
loose or faulty connects with the associ-  
ated leads. See wiring diagram.  
TP4  
TP5  
510P  
601  
602  
510  
NA5 SPEED METER L6233  
FIGURE F.10 SPEEDMETER PC BOARD AND TEST POINTS  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-69  
F-69  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
METER CIRCUIT ACCURACY TEST (Continued)  
13. Test Speedmeter Digital Meter  
Accuracy  
• Use a test meter with at least 3-  
1/2 digits and +/- 0.5% accuracy.  
• Connect the + probe to TP4 and  
the - probe to lead 510P. Do NOT  
disconnect plug.  
Note: The coating will have to be  
removed from the test points to ensure  
accurate meter readings.  
• With the NA-5 speedmeter read-  
ing SET values of STRIKE speed,  
adjust the strike wire speed con-  
trol until the test meter matches  
the settings in the table below.  
• If the NA-5 digital speedmeter  
does not match the readings, the  
digital meter may befaulty.  
NA-5 SET SPEED READING  
(IPM)  
TEST VOLTMETER READING  
150 (1.50*)  
300 (3.00*)  
.150 +/- .004VDC  
.300 +/- .004VDC  
*For Hi-Speed NA-5 speedmeter (IPM X 1000).  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-70  
F-70  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
METER CIRCUIT ACCURACY TEST (Continued)  
14. Test Speedmeter PC Board  
Accuracy  
• If the test meter does not match  
the readings, the speedmeter PC  
board may be faulty.  
• Use a test meter with at least 3-  
1/2 digits and +/- 0.5% accuracy.  
15. When the testing is complete close  
and secure the access door.  
• Connect the + probe to lead #519  
(Jumper lead) and the - probe to  
lead #510P. Do not  
nect plug.  
discon-  
Note: The coating will have to be  
removed from the test points to ensure  
accurate meter readings.  
• With the NA-5 speedmeter read-  
ing SET values of STRIKE speed ,  
adjust the strike wire speed con-  
trol until the NA-5 speedmeter  
matches the settings in the table  
below.  
SPEEDMETER  
CALIBRATION PIN  
NA-5 SET SPEED READING  
TEST VOLTMETER  
READING  
(IPM)  
21*  
57F  
57  
2.07*  
778  
762  
428  
456  
289  
300  
6.00 +/- .06  
6.00 +/- .06  
6.00 +/- .06  
6.00 +/- .06  
6.00 +/- .06  
6.00 +/- .06  
6.00 +/- .06  
95  
95S  
142  
142T  
* For Hi-Speed NA-5 speedmeter (IPM X 1000)  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-71  
F-71  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
PC BOARD(S) REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained per-  
sonnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to  
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For  
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precau-  
tions detailed throughout this manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform  
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.  
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).  
_____________________________________________________________  
DESCRIPTION  
The following procedure will aid the technician in removing and replacing the printed circuit  
boards for maintenance or replacement.  
This procedure takes approximately 17 minutes to perform.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
Phillips head screwdriver  
5/16" Nutdriver  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-72  
F-72  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
PC BOARD(S) REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (Continued)  
PROCEDURE  
Before starting the following procedure,  
refer  
to  
the  
PC  
Board  
Troubleshooting Procedures at the  
beginning of this section.  
1. Remove the input power to the NA-  
5.  
2. Using the 5/16" nutdriver open the  
control box PC board cover.  
3. Carefully remove the molex type  
plugs (and leads) connected to the  
PC board that is to be removed.  
4. Using the phillips head screwdriver,  
remove the PC board mounting  
screws.  
5. Carefully remove the PC board.  
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE  
1. Using the phillips head screwdriver  
and mounting screws carefully posi-  
tion and install the new PC board.  
2. Reconnect the molex type plugs  
(and leads) into the new PC board.  
3. Close and secure the access door.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-73  
F-73  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
DIGITAL METER AND METER PC BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained per-  
sonnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to  
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For  
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precau-  
tions detailed throughout this manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform  
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.  
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).  
_____________________________________________________________  
DESCRIPTION  
The following procedure will help the technician remove the digital meters and meter PC  
boards for repair or replacement.  
This meter PC Board portion of this procedure takes approximately 8 minutes to perform.  
The total Meter PC Board and Meter Replacement procedure takes approximately 15 minutes to perform.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
5/16" Nutdriver  
Phillips head screwdriver  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-74  
F-74  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
DIGITAL METER AND METER PC BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT  
METER PC BOARD REMOVAL  
PROCEDURE  
5. Carefully remove the meter PC  
board.  
1. Remove input power to the NA-5.  
2. Using the 5/16" nutdriver open the  
control box PC board access door.  
Note insulation placement for reassem-  
bly. Also make sure the plug on the  
back of the PC board plugs into the  
prongs on the meter when you  
reassemble.  
3. Locate and unplug the meter PC  
board that is to be removed. See  
Figure F.11  
4. Using the 5/16" nutdriver remove the  
four PC board mounting nuts. See  
Figure F.11  
SPEED METER BOARD  
METER BOARD  
MOUNTING  
NUTS  
PC BOARD  
PLUG PRONGS  
FIGURE F.11 METER PC BOARD, MOUNTING NUTS AND PLUG  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-75  
F-75  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
DIGITAL METER AND METER PC BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT  
DIGITAL METER REMOVAL  
PROCEDURE  
1. Using the phillips head screwdriver  
remove the four screws from the  
meter bezel. See Figure F.12  
4. Using the 5/16" nutdriver, remove  
the two nuts, screws and lockwash-  
ers holding the digital meter to the  
cover assembly.  
2. Carefully remove the bezel assem-  
bly.  
5. Carefully remove the digital meter.  
3. Carefully remove the meter shield  
assembly.  
MOUNTING  
INSULATOR  
DIGITAL  
METER  
METER SHIELD  
ASSEMBLY  
METER SHIELD  
METER BEZEL  
FIGURE F.12 METER BEZEL AND SCREW LOCATIONS  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-76  
F-76  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
DIGITAL METER AND METER PC BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT  
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE  
1. With the 5/16" nutdriver, fasten the  
digital meter to the cover assembly  
with two screws, nuts and lockwash-  
ers.  
2. Using the phillips head screwdriver,  
reattach the meter shield and bezel  
assembly.  
3. Position the insulation and plug the  
PC meter board into the digital  
meter.  
4. Mount the meter PC board using the  
four nuts previously removed.  
5. Reattach the molex plug.  
6. Close and secure the access door.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-77  
F-77  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
TACH PC BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained per-  
sonnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to  
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For  
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precau-  
tions detailed throughout this manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform  
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.  
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).  
_____________________________________________________________  
DESCRIPTION  
The following procedure will help the technician remove the Tach PC board and related com-  
ponents for repair or replacement.  
This procedure takes approximately 9 minutes to perform.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
5/16" Nutdriver  
Slot head screwdriver  
Phillips head screwdriver  
3/8" Wrench  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-78  
F-78  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
TACH PC BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (Continued)  
5. Using the phillips head screwdriver,  
PROCEDURE  
remove the two screws from the  
pick-up assembly cover . See  
Figure F.14. Remove the cover.  
1. Remove input power to the NA-5.  
2. With the 5/16" nutdriver locate and  
remove the four screws holding the  
tach cover to the wire feed drive  
motor. See Figure F.13  
6. Hold the nut in place with the 3/8"  
wrench. With the phillips head  
screwdriver, remove the locking  
screw from the rotating disc. See  
Figure F.15  
3. Using the 5/16" nutdriver remove the  
two screws from the connection box  
cover.  
4. Locate and disconnect the in-line  
connectors from leads #510A,  
#525A and #555.  
TACH COVER  
MOUNTING  
SCREWS (x4)  
PICKUP  
ASSEMBLY  
WIRE  
DRIVE  
MOTOR  
FIGURE F.13 DRIVE MOTOR, TACH COVER, AND CONNECTION BOX  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-79  
F-79  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
TACH PC BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (Continued)  
SCREWS  
TACHASSEMBLY  
COVER  
FIGURE F.14 PICK-UP ASSEMBLY AND COVER  
7. Carefully remove the rotating disc  
and tach PC board together. Note  
spacer washers underneath the disc.  
8. If tach PC board is to be removed  
carefully remove leads from connec-  
tion box and cover plate.  
PHILLIPS  
SCREW DISC  
NUT  
TACH  
PC BOARD  
FIGURE F.15 ROTATING DISC, NUT AND TACH BOARD  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-80  
F-80  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
TACH PC BOARD REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (Continued)  
REASSEMBLY  
1. Upon reassembly the spacers must  
be used to assure that the disc  
rotates freely and smoothly within  
the sensor "window" on the printed  
circuit board. Note the tach PC  
board must be held in place when  
aligning the rotating disc in the sen-  
sor window. Press down on the tach  
PC board with your finger to simulate  
the cover.  
2. Use the 3/8" wrench to hold the nut  
in place. Attach the rotating disc  
with the phillips head screw.  
3. Thread leads #510A, #525A and  
#555 through the cover plate and  
into the connection box. Attach to  
their respective in-line connectors.  
4. Replace the connection box cover.  
5. Replace the pick-up assembly cover.  
6. Reattach the tach cover to the wire  
feed drive motor.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-81  
F-81  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
WIRE DRIVE MOTOR REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT  
WARNING  
Service and repair should be performed only by Lincoln Electric factory trained per-  
sonnel. Unauthorized repairs performed on this equipment could result in danger to  
the technician or the machine operator and will invalidate your factory warranty. For  
your safety and to avoid electrical shock, please observe all safety notes and precau-  
tions detailed throughout this manual.  
If for any reason you do not understand the test procedures or are unable to perform  
the tests/repairs safely, contact the Lincoln Electric service department for technical  
troubleshooting assistance before you proceed.  
Call (216) 383-2531 or (800) 833-9353 (WELD).  
_____________________________________________________________  
DESCRIPTION  
This procedure will aid the technician in the removal and replacement of the drive motor to  
the gear box and also associated wiring to the control box.  
This procedure takes approximately 35 minutes to perform.  
MATERIALS NEEDED  
7/16" Wrench  
5/16" Nutdriver  
Large slot head screwdriver  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-82  
F-82  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
WIRE DRIVE MOTOR REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (Continued)  
MOTOR REMOVAL  
PROCEDURE  
6. Using the 5/16" nutdriver remove the  
clamp holding the connection box to  
the drive motor.  
1. Remove input power to the NA-5.  
2. Remove the motor and tach cable  
from the NA-5 control box.  
7. Carefully remove the connection box  
being careful not to stretch the leads.  
3. Perform the Tach Board Removal  
Procedure.  
4. Using the slot head screwdriver  
remove the two screws mounting the  
tach housing to the drive motor.  
Remove the tach housing from the  
drive motor.  
5. Using the phillips head screwdriver  
remove the cover plate adaptor.  
See Figure F.16  
TACH HOUSING  
COVER PLATE  
ADAPTER  
WIRE  
DRIVE  
MOTOR  
FIGURE F.16 DRIVE MOTOR AND TACH HOUSING  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-83  
F-83  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
WIRE DRIVE MOTOR REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (Continued)  
8. Remove leads #67, #627, #626,  
#539 and #541 from the terminal  
strip in the connector box.  
11. Carefully remove the adapter plate  
and motor assembly (with pinion  
attached).  
9. Using the 7/16" wrench, remove two  
1/4-20 bolts holding the adapter  
plate and motor assembly to the wire  
feed gear box. (Older models may  
have slot head 1/4-20 bolts). See  
Figure F.17  
12. With a slot head screwdriver,  
remove the adapter plate from the  
drive motor.  
10. Using the large slot head screwdriv-  
er, remove the two slot head screws  
that go through the wire feed gear  
box and into the adapter plate.  
HEX HEAD  
BOLT  
ADAPTER  
PLATE AND  
MOTOR  
ASSEMBLY  
WIRE DRIVE  
GEARBOX  
SLOT HEAD  
SCREW  
FIGURE F.17 DRIVE MOTOR  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-84  
F-84  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
WIRE DRIVE MOTOR REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (Continued)  
MOTOR REPLACEMENT  
PROCEDURE  
1. Attach the adapter plate to the drive  
motor using the slot head screwdriv-  
er.  
2. Carefully install the replacement  
motor (with correct pinion) and  
mount the adapter mounting plate  
using the 1/4-20 bolts and slot head  
screws previously removed.  
3. Attach leads #67, #627, #626, #539  
and #541 to their respective termi-  
nals in the connector box.  
4. Carefully position the connector box  
and clamp to the drive motor and  
using the 5/16' nutdriver secure in  
position. Be sure NOT to "pinch"  
any leads.  
5. Using the phillips head screwdriver  
mount the cover plate adaptor to the  
drive motor.  
6. Using the slot head screwdriver  
attach the tach housing to the drive  
motor.  
7. Perform  
the  
Tach  
Board  
Replacement Procedure.  
8. Assemble the motor and tach cables  
to the NA-5 control box.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-85  
F-85  
TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR  
RETEST AFTER REPAIR  
If a failed test indicates that any mechanical part that could affect the machine's electrical characteristics must be  
replaced or if any electrical components are repaired or replaced, the machine must be retested and must meet  
the following standards.  
Wire Feed Speed per following table:..........................  
Gear Ratio  
Wire Speed Range in/min (m/min)  
21/1  
57/1  
95/1  
100-2070 (2.54-52.58)  
38-778 (.97-19.76)  
22-456 (.56-11.58)  
15-300 (.38-7.62)  
142/1  
LEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Must operate per PC Board LED Definitions table in  
Troubleshooting Section.  
Flux or Water Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Must operate when "Start" switch is pressed.  
Relay 3CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Must operate and "close" power source contactor.  
Relay 2CR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Must operate and activate external travel circuit, if used.  
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Refer to Voltmeter Accuracy Test.  
Wire Speed Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Refer to Wire Speed Accuracy Test.  
Voltage control and shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Refer to Out of Voltage Range Shut Down Test.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F-86  
F-86  
NOTES  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-1  
G-1  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
-ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS SECTION-  
Electrical Diagrams....................................................................................................................Section G  
Wiring Diagram ....................................................................................................................................G-2  
Logic PC Board (L6242-1) Schematic .................................................................................................G-3  
Logic PC Board (L6242-2 & above) Schematic ...................................................................................G-4  
Power PC Board (L6252-1) Schematic................................................................................................G-5  
Power PC Board (L6252-2 & above) Schematic..................................................................................G-6  
Voltage PC Board Schematic ..............................................................................................................G-7  
Control Circuit Schematic ....................................................................................................................G-8  
Procedure Board Schematic................................................................................................................G-9  
Option & Timer Board Schematics.....................................................................................................G-10  
Meter PC Board Schematic & Layout ................................................................................................G-11  
Miscellaneous PC Board Layouts......................................................................................................G-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTES  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-2  
G-2  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
Wiring Diagram  
1 5 5 G 3  
564A  
OPTIONAL PULSE POWER  
FILTER P.C. BOARD  
LEAD PLUG  
581A  
OPTIONAL PROCEDURE MODULE  
USED FOR CRATER CONTROL  
FLUX RELAY MODULE  
87  
N.P.  
532  
4
ELECTRODE CABLE  
TO POWER SOURCE  
2
POWER P. C. BOARD  
N.F.  
OPTIONAL PROCEDURE MODULE  
USED FOR START CONTROL  
TIMER BOARD  
(CRATER TIME USE)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
626  
LOGIC  
585  
610  
CR1  
DIGITAL METER  
DIGITAL METER  
P.C. BOARD  
1
3
*
541  
627  
N.L.  
TRAVEL  
TIMER BOARD  
(START TIME USE)  
RELAY MODULE  
1
583C  
*
*
625  
SPEED-  
142  
95  
142T  
95S  
57F  
*
*
2
587  
565  
566  
584S  
588  
560  
561  
563  
563  
2
3
4
REED SWITCH ACTUATED BY  
WELDING CURRENT  
539  
VOLTMETER BOARD  
4
2
1
3
METER  
BOARD  
532  
N.P.  
N.P.  
4
8
525  
510  
500  
540  
525  
4
TIMER  
RECEPT.  
2
1/2A SLOW BLOW  
FIELD FUSE  
57  
6
5
3
2
4
1
688  
687  
530  
628  
N.M.  
589  
N.A.  
6
3
7
7
8
*
610  
CR2  
*
528  
500  
MAGNETICALLY  
COUPLED  
1
3
P28 (C)  
J28 (C)  
N.R.  
CR4  
TIMER  
RECEPT.  
CONTACTOR  
RELAY MODULE  
6
9
5
9
2
4
516  
514  
4
1
4
1
1/2A SLOW BLOW  
POWER FUSE  
6
2
5
3
6
2
5
3
9
5
510  
500  
500  
582  
581  
*
2
P28 (S)  
J28 (S)  
TRAVEL RECEPT.  
J5  
1
/
8
AMP  
635  
1
OPTION BOARD  
4
FAST BLOW  
FUSE  
*
A
532  
25  
531  
GND  
ELECTRODE LEAD BOLTED  
AND TAPED CONNECTION  
4
8
10  
3
7
6
2
510P  
(CRATER FILL USE)  
2
5
1
6
3
1
5
4
6
3
2
1
2
4
532  
531A  
631  
610  
585  
589  
584C  
564  
583S  
500  
B
C
D
*
N.R.  
*
CR3  
*
525  
510  
500  
1
3
OPTION BOARD  
(START USE)  
WELD TIMER BOARD  
(OPTIONAL)  
610  
531B  
500  
682  
5
6
3
682  
610  
J29 (C)  
P29 (C)  
ORANGE  
WHITE  
S
515  
500  
681  
500  
FLUX OR WATER  
SOLENOID  
87  
BLUE BLUE  
RED  
ORANGE  
RED  
5
J4  
FLUX RECEPTACLE  
4
1
11  
12  
530  
667  
621  
A
87  
F
N.E.  
J29 (S)  
531  
B
C
531  
GND  
B
P29 (S)  
6
A
B
C
587  
N.H  
J3 MOTOR RECEPTACLE  
D
A
4
5
3
2
1
A
541  
*
B
C
539  
626  
592  
531B  
687  
688  
D
E
F
627  
67  
N.C.  
CONTROL  
P.C. BOARD  
T1  
531B  
12  
540  
525  
510  
500  
628  
520  
532  
8
9
4
3
1
2
7
6
5
531B  
532  
637  
BYPASS  
COM  
10  
9
TIMER BOARD  
532  
(BURNBACK TIME)  
J2  
TACH. RECEPTACLE  
A
14  
13  
1
563  
*
TS2  
B
C
525A  
555  
AUTO  
N.N.  
511  
511A  
8
7
510P  
D
510A  
*
510P  
METER  
632  
512  
511  
511A  
510P  
586  
WELD TIME  
RECEPT.  
500  
*
A
2
T2  
F
CRATER RECEPT.  
START RECEPT.  
6
2
3
5
N.B.  
5
6
4
3
2
1
*
*
*
B
C
4
CIRCUIT  
POLARITY  
TERMINALS  
TS1  
500  
655  
515  
I
VOLTAGE P.C. BOARD  
31  
32  
21  
A
S
CONTROL  
CABLE  
TO  
SET-ACTUAL  
S7  
D
E
F
TS  
3
N.D.  
*
REMOTE INTERFACE  
MODULE (OPTIONAL)  
BURNBACK  
RECEPT.  
4
15  
N.J.  
510A  
POWER  
O
525A  
555  
G
H
B
START  
S5  
SOURCE  
11  
PROCEDURE BOARD  
ARM.  
C
1
581A  
500  
586  
592  
TACH.  
I
GREEN  
631  
6
PICK-UP  
N.R.  
*
5
4
2
3
P.C. BD.  
J1 INPUT RECEPTACLE  
WHITE  
TERMINAL  
STRIP JUMPER  
581A  
WELDING  
NOZZLE  
582  
515  
N.K.  
592  
S4  
500  
592  
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537  
N.A. SPEEDMETER BOARD CALIBRATION JUMPER IS TO BE CONNECTED FOR NA-5 HEAD AND DRIVE ROLL  
625  
531A  
R1  
531A  
531  
31  
32  
R
627  
626  
INCH  
DOWN  
UP  
WORK CABLE TO  
POWER SOURCE  
RF BYPASS  
P.C. BOARD  
25  
532  
610  
682  
500  
582  
500  
S3  
WORK  
532  
531  
EMPLOYED PER CHART BELOW: (CONNECTED TO PIN "95" OR "21"  
WHEN SHIPPED.  
621  
ELECTRODE  
667  
87  
531  
586  
5A CIRCUIT  
BREAKER  
CB1  
STOP  
"HOT" LIGHT  
LT1  
RED  
RED  
TRAVEL SW.  
S2  
POWER SW.  
S1  
S6  
SPEEDMETER NA-5 HEAD DRIVE ROLL  
WIRE SIZE  
RATED SPEED  
1/8 AMP FUSE  
N.G. 531-532 115VAC  
531-25 115VAC (SWITCHED)  
PIN  
57F  
57  
95  
95S  
RATIO  
PART NUMBER  
RANGE  
RANGE  
250 VAC  
SINGLE .035-.052  
SINGLE 1/16-3/32  
SINGLE 3/32-5/32  
SINGLE 1/16-3/32  
TWIN .045-.052  
40-778 I.P.M.  
38-762 I.P.M.  
22-428 I.P.M.  
23-456 I.P.M.  
57/1  
57/1  
95/1  
95/1  
S12778  
S12515  
S12514  
S12515  
N.H. 531-87 115 VAC (SWITCHED) 1/2 AMP.  
PROCEDURE KIT  
RECEPTACLE  
N.J. CONNECT #67 BLACK (ELECTRODE) LEAD AND #21 WHITE (WORK) LEAD TO APPROPRIATE TERMINAL STRIP  
POLARITY CONNECTIONS WHICH MATCH ELECTRODE AND WORK CABLE POLARITY CONNECTIONS TO POWER SOURCE.  
S13161-052  
S13161-5/64  
S14904(OUTER)  
S14905(INNER)  
S12514  
S14904(OUTER)  
S14905(INNER)  
S12778  
TWIN 1/16-5/64  
560  
564  
500  
1
N.K. LEAD CONNECTED TO MOTOR FRAME WHICH IS ELECTRICALLY COMMON WITH ELECTRODE DRIVE ROLL AND DRIVEN ELECTRODE.  
2
3
TWIN  
/
3
32  
NOTE: NA-5 MOTORS INSULATED FOR HIGH FREQUENCY STARTING DO NOT HAVE THIS CONNECTION. REFER TO  
HI-FREQUENCY INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR REQUIRED #67 ELECTRODE VOLTAGE SENSING LEAD CONNECTION.  
SINGLE 3/32-7/32  
15-289 I.P.M.  
15-300 I.P.M.  
100-2070 I.P.M.  
515500  
635  
520  
142  
142T  
142/1  
142/1  
4
5
6
N.L. REMOVE JUMPER PLUG TO INSTALL OPTIONAL KIT. IF KIT IS REMOVED, REPLACE JUMPER PLUG.  
TWIN 5/64-1/8  
*
N.M. NOT PRESENT ON EARLIER VOLTAGE P.C. BOARDS.  
21  
SINGLE .035-.052  
21/1  
632  
7
8
510P  
W
N.N. BLUE JUMPER LEAD NOT PRESENT ON EARLIER VOLTAGE P.C. BOARDS. THE JUMPER IS TO BE CONNECTED TO THE  
=
=
EARLIER SPEEDMETER BOARDS DID NOT HAVE THESE PINS.  
SINGLE "21" PIN ON HIGH SPEED BOARD ONLY.  
9
"COM" TAB, UNLESS SPECIFIED ON THE POWER SOURCE CONNECTION DIAGRAM TO BE CONNECTED TO THE "AUTO" TAB  
TO DISABLE THE "COLD" STARTING FEATURE.  
W
10  
11  
564A  
N.B. REMOVE START RECEPTACLE JUMPER PLUG FROM PROCEDURE BOARD TO INSTALL OPTIONAL PROCEDURE  
MODULE AS START PROCEDURE CONTROL. IF MODULE IS REMOVED, REPLACE JUMPER PLUG.  
114A 12  
N.P. EARLIER RELAYS HAD SAME TERMINAL NUMBERS BUT IN  
A
DIFFERENT ORIENTATION.  
N.L.  
N.R. POTENTIOMETERS AND SWITCHES MOUNTED ON P.C. BOARD ARE CONNECTED TO FRAME, FOR ESD.  
(NOT PRESENT ON EARLIER BOARDS)  
JUMPER PLUG  
N.C. REMOVE CRATER RECEPTACLE JUMPER PLUG FROM PROCEDURE BOARD TO INSTALL OPTIONAL PROCEDURE  
MODULE AS CRATER PROCEDURE CONTROL AND CONNECT LOGIC BOARD LEAD #694 TO PIN #P10.  
IF MODULE IS REMOVED, REPLACE JUMPER PLUG AND LOGIC BOARD LEAD #694 TO PIN #P8.  
N.D. CONTROL BOARD JUMPER LEAD CONNECTED TO PIN "F" WHEN SHIPPED. SEE OPERATING MANUAL FOR  
USE OF PIN "S" JUMPER CONNECTION.  
N.E. VOLTAGE BOARD RED JUMPER LEAD CONNECTED TO PIN "S" AND WHITE JUMPER LEAD CONNECTED TO  
PIN "B" WHEN SHIPPED, FOR USE TYPICALLY WITH DC-[ ]TYPE POWER SOURCES. REFER TO CONNECTION  
DIAGRAM FOR ALTERNATE CONNECTIONS, AND JUMPER CONNECTIONS FOR R3S, SAM AND SAF OR SA  
POWER SOURCES WITH K224. EARLIER VOLTAGE BOARDS DO NOT CONTAIN PIN "D".  
*
CAVITY NUMBERING SEQUENCE  
(COMPONENT SIDE OF P.C. BOARD)  
N.F. LOGIC BOARD DIP SWITCHES OR JUMPERS TO BE SET TO SUIT DESIRED APPLICATIONS PER CHARTS BELOW:  
NA-5 SHIPPED CONNECTED FOR INDICATED METHODS OF TRAVEL  
&
BURNBACK.  
METHODS OF TRAVEL  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
FOR EARLIER LOGIC P.C.  
BOARDS WITH JUMPERS  
FOR LOGIC P.C. BOARDS WITH  
1
2
3
4
DIP SWITCHES  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
CONNECT  
SAMPLE SWITCH  
LEAD #691 to P6  
LEAD #692 to P5  
START/STOP WITH SWITCHES  
SWITCH POSITION  
SWITCH POSITION  
1
2
IS UP  
SWITCH #1  
SWITCH #2  
IS DOWN  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
CONNECT  
SWITCH POSITIONS  
3
AND  
4
ARE NOT APPLICABLE  
LEAD #691 to P6  
LEAD #692 to P7  
START/STOP WITH WELD CURRENT  
METHODS OF BURNBACK  
J28  
J29  
SWITCH #1  
SWITCH #2  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
FOR LOGIC P.C. BOARDS WITH  
DIP SWITCHES  
CONNECT  
FOR EARLIER LOGIC P.C.  
BOARDS WITH JUMPERS  
START WITH WELD CURRENT  
STOP WITH STOP SWITCH  
LEAD #691 to P5  
LEAD #692 to P7  
USE OF OPTIONAL CRATER MODULE  
CRATER BOARD INSTALLED?  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SWITCH #1  
SWITCH #2  
CONNECT  
LEAD #690 TO P4  
LEAD #693 TO P3  
WIRE FEED STOP WITH  
CONTACTOR DELAY  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
FOR EARLIER LOGIC P.C.  
BOARDS WITH JUMPERS  
FOR LOGIC P.C. BOARDS WITH  
DIP SWITCHES  
CONNECT  
START WITH START SWITCH  
STOP AFTER CRATER TIME  
(OPTIONAL PROCEDURE MODULE  
LEAD #691 to P6  
LEAD #692 to P9  
SWITCH #1  
1
SWITCH #2  
1
2
3
4
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SWITCH #1  
SWITCH #2  
CONNECT  
CONNECT  
LEAD #690 TO P4  
LEAD #693 TO P1  
YES  
NO  
INSTALLED IN CRATER RECEPTACLE)  
LEAD #694 TO P10  
INCH UP WITH CONTACTOR DELAY  
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE  
ON HOLE SIZES PER E2056  
THIS SHEET CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION  
1-12-96D  
7-12-96P  
EQUIP.  
TYPE  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
NA-5  
THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO.  
CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.  
CONNECT  
SWITCH #1  
1
SWITCH #2  
1
SWITCH #1  
SWITCH #2  
OWNED BY  
AND IS  
8-24-84H  
11-14-86L  
7-19-91J  
START WITH START SWITCH  
STOP AFTER BURN-BACK TIME  
(OPTIONAL PROCEDURE MODULE  
THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO.  
ON  
ON  
2
3
PLACE DECIMALS IS .02  
PLACE DECIMALS IS .002  
NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISCLOSED OR USED  
WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF  
LEAD #691 to P6  
LEAD #692 to P8  
2
3
4
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
CONNECT  
LEAD #690 TO P2  
LEAD #693 TO P1  
CONNECT  
WIRING DIAGRAM  
SUBJECT  
ON ALL ANGLES IS .5 OF  
A
DEGREE  
INCH UP WITH NO CONTACTOR  
DELAY  
SCALE  
NONE  
LEAD #694 TO P8  
SWITCH #1  
SWITCH #2  
t
SHT.  
NO.  
MATERIAL TOLERANCE (" ") TO AGREE  
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS.  
7-10-92B  
5-19-95D  
INSTALLED IN CRATER RECEPTACLE)  
THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO.  
G1512  
8-1-80  
DAD  
5-8-92  
REF.  
1553  
DR  
DATE  
CHK  
SUP'S'D'G  
G
SWITCH #1  
SWITCH #2  
NOTE: This diagram is for reference only. It may not be accurate for all machines covered by this manual.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-3  
G-3  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
LOGIC PC BOARD (L6242-1) SCHEMATIC  
LED 7B  
610  
A6G  
583S  
PROCEDURE  
PROCEDURE  
PC BOARD  
564  
D1021  
RED  
D1023  
REMOTE INTERFACE  
OPTION  
PC BOARD  
WELD TIME  
OVER  
START TIME  
OVER  
515  
D8C  
WELD  
24  
X705  
P10  
X705  
X701  
C
PROCEDURE  
9
10  
B
R741  
A7E VAC  
R1001  
8
9
F
8
ENABLE  
D718  
START  
Q711  
D1001  
3
4
D712  
581A  
D1024  
D1022  
CR2  
RED  
D1002  
DISABLE  
LED 7H  
TRAVEL  
CR  
694  
R706  
C727  
P5  
1001  
N.C.  
X705  
X707  
A
1
2
581  
S801A  
DZ702  
3
6
D1004  
C1001  
24V SIG.  
D722  
589  
500  
D9C  
F1001  
+
692  
N.A.  
D1003  
SWITCH  
CR  
C706  
X701  
D
1001  
581A  
13  
12  
R720  
E
S5  
11 11  
10  
Q702  
START  
N.D.  
D1005  
560  
PROCEDURE  
PC BOARD  
D1A  
X705  
12  
START  
C719  
D708  
565  
X701  
A
X707  
B
4
1
2
PROCEDURE  
PC BOARD  
PRESET  
MONITOR  
ENABLE  
A
R1002  
500  
D9C  
689  
+
3
6
13  
D1006  
5
500  
A7H  
D1007  
SIGNAL  
COMMOM  
WELD TIME  
OVER  
SWITCH  
CR  
N.B.  
CR  
515  
D8C  
1002  
COMMON  
1002  
582  
Q709  
+
610  
A6G  
C725  
D1009  
+
C705  
500  
D9C  
D3A  
C1002  
D1008  
SWITCH  
691  
X701  
B
515  
D8C  
5
24V SIG.  
500  
D9C  
CR6  
4
ELECTRODE  
HOT  
D1010  
.047  
MFD  
N.D.  
LED 7C  
STOP  
D710  
R703  
D726  
R735  
CR  
R1003  
C728  
1003  
586  
LT1  
R
D1011  
CR3  
500  
D9C  
582  
D1012  
CR  
DZ701  
D725  
530  
1003  
D7J  
D720  
HOLD-LOW  
DISABLE  
500  
D9C  
LED 7K  
P6  
P8  
X705  
6
C704  
584C  
D723  
X702  
C
PROCEDURE  
PC BOARD  
C4D  
D1014  
+
10  
9
C
S6  
STOP  
D1013  
SWITCH  
C1003  
POWER  
SOURCE  
OUTPUT  
X707  
13  
12  
682  
5
CRATER  
TIME  
515  
8
R725  
D
11  
Q708  
24V SIG.  
Q704  
D8C  
INITIATE  
D1015  
C724  
INCH UP  
500  
D9C  
C721  
R1004  
D709  
515  
D8C  
D1016  
500  
D9C  
C711  
500  
A7H  
CR  
C708  
500  
D9C  
PROCEDURE  
PC BOARD  
D1017  
SIGNAL  
COMMOM  
566  
1004  
592  
CR  
1004  
500  
D9C  
BURNBACK  
TIME OVER  
D715  
D716  
X706  
SWITCH  
COMMON D1018  
SWITCH  
D7A  
687  
X707  
C
610  
A6G  
D1019  
10  
9
+
C
688  
SHUTDOWN  
ENABLE  
N.E.  
SHUT-  
DOWN  
C1004  
6
8
5
LED7D  
690  
24V SIG.  
P4  
500  
D9C  
P1  
C5K  
C5E  
C4M  
9
500  
D9C  
C729  
N.D.  
D1020  
X706  
ARC CONTROL  
ENABLE  
D
F
INCH DOWN  
R712  
R733  
528  
CR4  
CURRENT  
8
+
CURRENT  
Q707  
D714  
P7  
C707  
X706  
12  
CR5  
588  
C723  
13  
PROCEDURE  
PC BOARD  
D719  
500  
D9C  
CURRENT  
584S  
X706  
500  
D9C  
N.A. S801 (SEE PROCEDURE PC BOARD  
SCHEMATIC) MUST BE IN "STRIKE"  
POSITION TO START WELD CYCLE.  
515  
X702  
A
2
1
E
}
D8C  
681  
3
6
11  
10  
START  
TIME  
R723  
PROCEDURE  
PCB  
561  
PROCEDURE  
PC BOARD  
563  
Q703  
N.B. COMPONENTS INCLUDED WITH  
OPTIONAL LINC-FILL BYPASS KIT  
(ALSO SEE SCHEMATIC A).  
Q710  
INITIATE  
STRIKE PROCEDURE  
DISABLE  
STRIKE  
X702  
B
DZ706  
L701  
C720  
X706  
2
637  
PROCEDURE  
4
R739  
VOLTAGE  
PRESENT  
A
ENABLE  
N.C. LEAD 694 TO BE CONNECTED TO  
500  
A7H  
1
5
C2M  
PIN P10 IF OPTIONAL CRATER MODULE  
(SEE SCHEMATIC E) IS INSTALLED, OR  
X702  
D
12  
13  
C726  
11  
610  
A6G  
CRATER  
TIME OVER  
BURNBACK  
TIME  
P2  
TO PIN P8 IF REMOVED.  
500  
D9C  
515  
D8C  
N.D. LOGIC BOARD JUMPER LEADS ARE TO  
X704  
2
Q701  
+
X704  
4
BE CONNECTED TO SUIT APPLICATION  
PER CHARTS BELOW.  
N.E. HOLD-LOW DISABLE IS USED WITH  
G1556-1 AND EARLIER VOLTAGE BOARDS.  
ARC CONTROL ENABLE IS USED WITH  
LATER VOLTAGE BOARDS.  
P9  
B
A
3
6
X706  
5
1
PROCEDURE  
PC BOARD  
P3  
INITIATE  
B
LED  
7E  
D717  
3
4
583C  
X703  
4
587  
CR1  
FEED  
FORWARD  
C709  
X704  
D
X704  
C
X703  
C
9
B
6
13  
12  
9
10  
LED 7G  
8
8
D721  
11  
5
LED 7J  
A3K  
10  
586  
B7J  
DZ703  
FEED  
592  
C3K  
D724  
LEAD  
NO.  
TO PIN  
NO.  
N.D.  
FLUX OR  
WATER  
2
DZ705  
X703  
ENABLE  
585  
Q705  
METHODS OF TRAVEL  
Q706  
693  
X705  
X703  
START-STOP  
691  
P6  
A
3
12  
R731  
592  
R718  
D
692  
P5  
WITH SWITCHES  
1
D
11  
2
1
S3  
INCH  
UP  
13  
START-STOP  
691  
692  
P6  
P7  
C722  
WITH WELD CURRENT  
C710  
C712  
S4  
691  
P5  
500  
A7H  
START WITH WELD CURRENT  
DZ704  
INCH  
DOWN  
692  
P7  
STOP WITH STOP SWITCH  
500  
D9C  
691  
692  
WHEN OPTIONAL  
START WITH START SWITCH  
STOP AFTER CRATER TIME  
P6  
P9  
500  
D9C  
PROCEDURE MODULE  
IS INSTALLED IN  
CRATER RECEPTACLE  
START WITH START SWITCH  
STOP AFTER BURN-BACK TIME  
691  
P6  
692  
P8  
LEAD  
NO.  
TO PIN  
NO.  
METHODS OF BURNBACK  
FOR LOGIC P.C. BOARDS L6242-2 OR HIGHER USE G2974 SCHEMATIC FOR  
COMPONENT VALUES AND CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS.  
P4  
WIRE FEED STOP WITH  
690  
FOR REMOTE INTERFACE PC. BOARDS L6580-1  
OR HIGHER USE S21207 SCHEMATIC FOR  
CONTACTOR DELAY  
693  
P3  
690  
693  
INCH UP WITH  
P4  
P1  
COMPONENT VALUES AND CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS.  
LOGIC P.C. BOARD  
CONTACTOR DELAY  
OPTIONAL REMOTE INTERFACE P.C. BOARD  
690  
INCH UP WITH NO  
P2  
C701  
C702  
C703  
C704  
C705  
C706  
C707  
C708  
C709  
C710  
THRU  
C729  
D701  
THRU  
D712  
D714  
THRU  
D717  
D718  
THRU  
D721  
D722  
THRU  
D726  
DZ701  
DZ702  
DZ703  
DZ704  
DZ705  
DZ706  
L701  
.22/100  
500/50  
4.7/35  
.047/100  
10/25  
16V, 1W  
R704  
R705  
R706  
R707  
R708  
R709  
R710  
R711  
R712  
R713  
R714  
R715  
R716  
R717  
R718  
R720  
R721  
R722  
R723  
R724  
R725  
R726  
R727  
47K  
470  
R728  
R729  
R730  
R731  
R732  
R733  
R734  
R735  
R736  
R737  
R738  
R739  
R740  
R741  
R742  
X701  
X702  
X703  
X704  
X707  
X705  
X706  
X708  
2.7K  
1.5K  
68K  
22K  
47K  
22K  
47K  
22K  
47K  
6.8K  
47K  
10K  
15K  
10K  
15K  
2/50  
C1001 THRU C1004  
CR1001 THRU CR1004  
D1001 THRU D1004  
F1001  
693  
P1  
CONTACTOR DELAY  
16V, 1W  
SPDT, 24VDC  
1A, 600V  
1/8A FUSE  
150  
FOR LEAD #694 CONNECTION SEE N.C.  
3V, 1/2W  
16V, 1W  
3V, 1/2W  
5.1V, 1/2W  
5.6mH, 28mA  
100  
NA-5 SHIPPED CONNECTED FOR INDICATED  
METHODS OF TRAVEL AND BURNBACK.  
4.7K  
47K  
470  
470  
15K  
470  
4.7K  
4.7K  
100K  
22K  
4.7K  
100  
2.7K  
1.5K  
68K  
2.7K  
1.5K  
2.7K  
1.5K  
68K  
R1001 THRU R1004  
KEY TO SYMBOLS  
POWER SUPPLY SOURCE POINT  
.047/100  
10/25  
COMPONENTS NOT ON P.C. BOARD  
10/25  
10/25  
LED 7A  
THRU  
CR1  
SPST 110 VDC RELAY COIL  
(N.O. CONTACTS SHOWN ON  
SCHEMATIC A)  
SCHEMATIC LOCATION REFERENCE  
CR2  
CR3  
RED  
LED 7E  
LED 7G  
LED 7H  
LED 7J  
LED 7K  
Q701  
HORIZONTAL CO-ORDINATE LETTER  
VERTICAL CO-ORDINATE NUMBER  
SCHEMATIC IDENTIFICATION LETTER  
}
}
LIGHT  
EMITTING  
DIODE  
.022/25  
REED SWITCH ACTUATED BY  
WELDING CURRENT  
CR4  
CR5  
CR6  
}
}
}
}
}
}
OPTIONAL 110 VDC RELAY  
COIL ACTUATED BY CR4  
1A, 400V  
1A, 400V  
1A, 1000V  
1A, 400V  
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, COMPONENT VALUES OF:  
CAPACITORS MFD/VOLTS  
RESISTORS OHMS, 2 /WATT  
SINCE COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY ON  
BOARD MAY CHANGE WITHOUT AFFECTING THE INTERCHANGE-  
ABILITY OF COMPLETE BOARD, THIS DIAGRAM MAY NOT  
SHOW THE EXACT COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY OF CONTROLS  
HAVING COMMON CODE NUMBER.  
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537  
}
2N 4123  
2N 5657  
=
=
OPTIONAL LINC-FILL  
SOLID-STATE PILOT RELAY  
INDICATOR LIGHT  
Q702  
1
QUAD  
INPUT  
NAND  
GATE  
2
THRU  
LT1  
S3  
S4  
A
PRINTED CIRCUIT  
Q705  
}
Q706  
THRU  
Q711  
R701  
R702  
R703  
SPST PUSH BUTTON SWITCH  
A
2N 4123  
S5  
}
HEX  
S6  
}
4.7K  
4.7K  
100  
INVERTER  
A
TIC  
22V 600mA SECONDARY  
+15  
V
VOLTAGE  
(PRIMARY SHOWN ON SCHEMATIC A)  
1-12-96D  
REGULATOR  
L6682-4  
CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.  
NOTE: Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not available from Lincoln Electric. This information is provided  
for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the machine.  
NA-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-4  
G-4  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
LOGIC PC BOARD (L6242-2 & above) SCHEMATIC  
2 9 7 G 4  
1
610  
515  
J1  
22.1K  
515  
515  
D11  
515  
583S  
22.1K  
R52  
J4  
4
68.1K  
PROCEDURE  
PC BOARD  
J4  
CR2  
PROCEDURE  
LED 7B  
2
564  
D12  
PC BOARD  
START TIME  
OVER  
WELD TIME  
OVER  
1N4007  
1A  
D18  
WELD  
PROCEDURE  
ENABLE  
1000V  
J1  
LED 7H  
4
9
8
1.00K  
D22  
10  
1
2
X1  
A
X5  
A
R40  
1A  
1.50K  
589  
400V  
10.0K  
START  
Q11  
2N4401  
TRAVEL  
C27  
.022  
50V  
DISABLE  
515  
15 N.F.  
16  
1
J2  
1N4004  
581  
1
S2 -1  
581A  
100K  
1
3
4
R6  
R4  
3
4
X5  
B
A
Q2  
2N5657  
X7  
X7  
2
100  
475  
2
R20  
N.A.  
2.67K  
C6  
S5  
START  
500  
J3  
D13  
500  
C31  
C19  
.022  
50V  
NOTES:  
560  
PROCEDURE  
PC BOARD  
8
6
5
2N4403  
Q18  
100K  
R53  
500  
PRESET  
MONITOR  
ENABLE  
B
N.A. SWITCH (SEE PROCEDURE P.C. BOARD SCHEMATIC)  
MUST BE IN "STRIKE" POSITION TO START WELD  
CYCLE  
500  
7.68K  
-2  
14  
S1  
3
N.F.  
515  
500  
Q9  
2N4401  
N.B. COMPONENTS INCLUDED WITH OPTIONAL LINC-FILL  
BYPASS KIT (ALSO SEE SCHEMATIC A)  
13  
12  
C32  
11  
1
4
13  
X1  
2
B
C25  
.022  
50V  
3
2N4403  
Q12  
X1  
C
D
R41  
2
515  
N.C. DIP SWITCHES ARE TO BE SET TO SUIT APPLICATION  
PER CHARTS BELOW  
7.68K  
515  
100K  
515  
S1 -1  
15  
N.F.  
N.D. HOLD-LOW DISABLE IS USED WITH G1556-1 AND  
EARLIER VOLTAGE BOARDS. ARC CONTROL ENABLE  
IS USED WITH LATER VOLTAGE BOARDS.  
500  
J5  
6.81K  
6
5
D26  
4
16  
1
X1  
68.1K  
LED 7C  
6
515  
515  
D10  
689  
1.00K  
J2  
N.E. SINCE COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY ON  
CIRCUIT BOARD MAY CHANGE WITHOUT AFFECTING THE  
INTERCHANGEABILITY OF COMPLETE BOARD, THIS  
DIAGRAM MAY NOT SHOW THE EXACT COMPONENTS OR  
CIRCUITRY OF CONTROLS HAVING COMMON CODE NUMBER.  
A
PRINTED  
ELECTRODE  
HOT  
D25  
J2  
22.1K  
530  
A
584C  
9
8
3
1.50K  
J4  
1
D15  
CR3  
PROCEDURE  
PC BOARD  
R
LT1  
13  
12  
10  
9
8
HOLD-LOW  
ENABLE  
X5  
D
X2  
A
11  
X7  
C
A
582  
D32  
Q8  
2N4401  
CRATER TIME  
INITIATE  
R42  
4
N.F. SCHEMATIC SHOWN WITH DIP SWITCHES IN THE "UP" POSITION.  
R17  
100  
R19  
475  
J1  
6
22.1K  
475  
C5  
CR6  
4.7  
475  
D27  
500  
C24  
.022  
50V  
LED 7K  
POWER  
SOURCE  
OUTPUT  
S6  
STOP  
D9  
35V  
100K  
D20  
1A  
1000V  
1N4007  
D23  
1A  
C11  
.022  
50V  
C8  
10  
25V  
682  
500  
400V  
J2  
5
500  
1N4004  
N.B.  
Methods of Travel  
687  
515  
500  
500  
500  
D8  
SHUT DOWN  
J3  
2
D16  
500  
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
4
4
4
4
Start/stop with switches  
515  
Q4  
565  
WELD TIME  
R25  
2.67K  
2N5657  
22.1K  
OVER  
PC BOARD  
PROCEDURE  
C21  
.022  
50V  
SWITCH #1  
2
SWITCH #2  
C37  
515  
S2 -4  
515  
9
8
N.F.  
2N4403  
Q13  
8
9
10  
1
2
11  
10  
100K  
J3  
3
D
X6  
X5  
R43  
X7  
A
E
2
3
566  
Start/stop with weld  
current  
7.68K  
1.50K  
BURNBACK  
TIME OVER  
SHUT DOWN  
ENABLE  
500  
7
10  
C4  
.022  
50V  
S1 -4  
N.D.  
11  
6
N.F.  
N.F.  
12  
10  
7
J2  
SWITCH #1  
2
SWITCH #2  
S1 -3  
6
688  
15.0K  
5
2
3
D28  
ARC CONTROL  
ENABLE  
500  
LED 7D  
Start with weld current  
Stop with stop switch  
9
8
SWITCH #1  
2
SWITCH #2  
Q7  
3
4
R12  
100  
R33  
X6  
B
2N4401  
CR5  
D14  
22.1K  
CURRENT  
J5  
Start with start switch  
Stop after crater time  
(Optional procedure  
module installed in crater  
receptacle)  
2
3
C7  
10  
515  
C26  
2
25V  
100K  
J1  
1N4007  
1A  
D19  
528  
3
C33  
500  
588  
1000V  
SWITCH #1  
2
SWITCH #2  
J3  
CURRENT  
PROCEDURE  
PC BOARD  
5
6
1
2
7
X6  
C
2N4403  
Q14  
X8  
A
R44  
681  
CR4  
CURRENT  
584S  
500  
Start with start switch  
2
3
7.68K  
Stop after burn-back time  
(Optional procedure  
module installed in crater  
receptacle)  
1
J3  
PROCEDURE  
PC BOARD  
3
9
8
Q3  
2N5657  
B
4
R23  
X2  
X6  
D
500  
2
SWITCH #1  
SWITCH #2  
2.67K  
J3  
6
START  
TIME  
INITIATE  
J3  
J3  
100K  
9
5
563  
C20  
.022  
50V  
PROCEDURE  
PC BOARD  
561  
STRIKE PROCEDURE  
DISABLE  
PROCEDURE  
PCB  
563  
DZ1  
6
5
STRIKE  
Optional Crater Module Installed?  
Q10  
4
R39  
22.1K  
X2  
C
2N4401  
PROCEDURE  
ENABLE  
11  
10  
500  
R32  
475  
E
X6  
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5.1V  
1W  
Yes  
100K  
C23  
.022  
50V  
13  
12  
11  
X2  
D
515  
515  
SWITCH #1  
2
SWITCH #2  
515  
515  
1
3
4
1
2
3
4
500  
No  
515  
475  
15.0K  
D29  
1.50K  
1
6
3
4
SWITCH #1  
SWITCH #2  
X4  
A
X4  
5
B
CRATER  
2
C36  
TIME OVER  
BURNBACK  
TIME  
221K  
R15  
3
4
D30  
2N4403  
Q17  
J5  
1
X8  
B
R48  
PROCEDURE  
PC BOARD  
637  
Q1  
R35  
100  
2N4401  
INITIATE  
7.68K  
LED 7E  
J3  
1
13  
12  
C35  
Methods of Burnback  
X6  
F
VOLTAGE  
PRESENT  
583C  
C2  
.022  
50V  
C9  
Q16  
2N4403  
CR1  
R46  
4.7  
D31  
500  
D17  
68.1K  
1
1
1
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
1
1
1
2
3
4
4
4
6
5
Wire feed stop with  
contactor delay  
35V  
13  
4
9
7.68K  
X3  
B
Q15  
11  
5
6
10  
47.5K  
X4  
C
X5  
C
N.F.  
R45  
X3  
C
2N4401  
12  
8
J1  
11  
6
D21  
12  
S2 -3  
5
5
22.1K  
SWITCH #1  
2
SWITCH #2  
1N4007  
500  
1A  
LED 7G  
FLUX OR  
C34  
1000V  
D24  
2.67K  
1
J5  
585  
2
3
1A  
3
WATER  
Inch up with contactor  
delay  
4
X3  
A
R49  
100  
587  
400V  
1N4004  
2
515  
515  
515  
(TO POWER P.C. BOARD)  
FEED FORWARD  
500  
SWITCH #1  
2
SWITCH #2  
13  
12  
Q5  
2N5657  
11  
X3  
D
D33  
LED 7J  
2
3
100K  
C22  
.022  
50V  
Inch up with no contactor  
delay  
1.00K  
D34  
D35  
1.50K  
SWITCH #1  
SWITCH #2  
J5  
3
FEED  
586  
J5  
592  
ENABLE  
5
6
500  
5
R50  
100  
X8  
C
C3  
.022  
50V  
NA-5 SHIPPED CONNECTED FOR INDICATED  
METHODS OF TRAVEL BURNBACK.  
Q6  
S4  
D6  
R31  
2N4401  
&
S3  
INCH  
22.1K  
DOWN  
515  
INCH  
UP  
100K  
C10  
.022  
50V  
500  
500  
D5  
X9  
J4  
J2  
2
500  
628  
6
515  
IN  
OUT  
7815  
(HS)  
J1  
GENERAL INFORMATION  
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537  
LAST NO. USED  
D2  
500  
D1  
2
R-  
C-  
B-  
2
DZ1-  
1
63  
37  
Q- 18  
LED-  
515  
GND  
1.50K  
BLU  
J-  
5
2
7K  
CAPACITORS  
RESISTORS  
DIODES  
=
MFD  
(
.022/50V  
1/4W  
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)  
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)  
LOGIC  
POWER  
SUPPLY  
500  
B1  
S-  
D- 35  
X-  
9
LABELS  
=
Ohms  
(
C12  
500  
50V  
C1  
=
1A, 400V  
(UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)  
SUPPLY  
VOLTAGE NET  
.22  
22VAC  
C13  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
D7  
100V  
4.7  
POWER SUPPLY SOURCE POINT  
COMMON CONNECTION  
35V  
B2  
LED 7A  
T1C  
BLU  
X5  
X6  
X8  
C15  
C16  
C17  
C18  
C28  
C29  
C30  
X1  
X2  
X3  
X4  
X7  
FRAME CONNECTION  
D4  
D3  
C14  
.022  
50V  
FILENAME: G2974_2DA  
THIS SHEET CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OWNED BY  
THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO.  
4011  
4011  
4011  
4011  
4011  
J4  
3
EARTH GROUND CONNECTION  
AND IS NOT TO BE REPRODUCED, DISCLOSED OR USED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF  
THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO.  
500  
500  
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
EQUIP.  
TYPE  
Ch'ge.Sht.No.  
NA-5  
LOGIC CIRCUIT  
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE  
ON HOLES SIZES PER E-2056  
PLACE DECIMALS IS  
PLACE DECIMALS IS  
ON ALL ANGLES IS  
MATERIAL TOLERANCE ("t") TO AGREE  
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS  
THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO.  
CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.  
500  
1-12-96D  
ON  
ON  
2
3
+
.O2  
.OO2  
DEGREE  
J4  
5
SUBJECT  
+
NONE  
9-27-94  
SCALE  
DATE  
+
.5 OF  
A
SHT.  
NO.  
500  
LOGIC POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION AND BYPASSING  
G 2974  
MAB  
CHK.  
SUP'S'D'G.  
DR.  
NOTE: Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not available from Lincoln Electric. This information is provided  
for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the machine.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NA-5  
G-5  
G-5  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
POWER PC BOARD (L6252-1) SCHEMATIC  
C
G
J
A
B
D
E
F
H
K
L
M
525  
CONTROL POWER AND  
EMERGENCY STOP  
CB1  
S1A  
A5H  
31  
531  
R1  
631  
531A  
540  
PT  
1
102B  
C104  
B2L  
500  
C119  
PT101A  
FLUX OR  
+
C107  
531  
WATER SOLENOID  
RECEPTACLE  
A6H  
SCR  
102  
CR7  
666  
SCR  
101  
TRAVEL  
RECEPTACLE  
87  
500  
A6H  
531  
QU101  
541  
C105  
C106  
C101  
C108  
25  
GND  
C102  
115 VAC  
INPUT  
PT  
103B  
2
532  
C109  
C121  
AUTO  
OFF  
PT101C  
C1105  
PT101B  
C1104  
C110  
F101  
WIRE FEED  
MOTOR  
PT102A  
PT103A  
SCR  
103  
BLU  
BLK  
SCR  
104  
87  
ARMATURE  
WIRE FEED  
TP101  
D103  
MOTOR FIELD  
S2  
TRAVEL  
627  
WH  
587  
FEED  
FORWARD  
CR6  
D2G  
HAND  
C1106  
Q102  
LED  
1C  
C112  
TO TACH  
PICK-UP  
P.C. BOARD  
D6G  
3
4
C103  
R102  
LED  
1E  
D101  
D102  
CR2  
D1K  
Q101  
C122  
C1105  
LED  
1D  
CR1  
D6K  
RED  
626  
Q103  
C120  
F102  
32  
S1B  
C111  
532  
532  
539  
FIELD SUPPLY  
ARMATURE SUPPLY  
TP102  
500  
A6H  
GND  
FEED DIRECTION CIRCUIT  
D108  
X101  
GND  
525  
OUT  
IN  
+15V  
D110  
D104  
D105  
ANALOG  
ANALOG  
RED  
BLK  
+
+
531B  
POWER SUPPLY  
18  
VAC  
2
4
C116  
C117  
C114  
C115  
510  
115  
VAC  
WHT  
LED 1A  
ZERO-VOLT  
5
6
18  
VAC  
D111  
DZ101  
+
REFERNCE  
C113  
+
CR3  
D3K  
532  
BLK  
RED  
T1A  
D106  
GND  
X102  
LED 1B  
D107  
500  
-10V  
YLW  
OUT  
IN  
601  
10  
VAC  
METER  
SUPPLY  
D109  
602  
610  
YLW  
ORG  
RELAY  
D112  
D113  
T1B  
BLK  
POWER SUPPLY  
LED 1F  
C118  
115  
VAC  
115  
VAC  
TP  
BLK  
103  
ORG  
BRN  
D114  
T2A  
T2B  
D115  
500  
24  
VAC  
INTERFACE OPTION  
POWER SUPPLY  
7
FOR POWER P.C. BOARDS L6252-2 OR HIGHER USE L8956  
SCHEMATIC FOR COMPONENT VALUES AND CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS.  
BRN  
POWER P.C. BOARD  
R.F. BYPASS P.C. BOARD  
KEY TO SYMBOLS  
COMPONENTS NOT ON P.C. BOARD  
5A. CIRCUIT BREAKER  
FOR R.F. BYPASS P.C. BOARDS M14133-1 OR  
HIGHER USE S20995 SCHEMATIC FOR  
COMPONENT VALUES AND CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS.  
C101  
C102  
C103  
C104  
C105  
C106  
C107  
C108  
C109  
C110  
C111  
C112  
C113  
C114  
C115  
C116  
C117  
C118  
C119  
C120  
C121  
C122  
D101  
D102  
D103  
D104  
THRU  
D111  
D112  
THRU  
D115  
Q101  
Q102  
Q103  
QU101  
2N4123  
2N5816  
2N5816  
UJT  
SCR 101  
CB1  
.005/1400  
.15/200  
50/250  
.15/200  
.047/100  
.047/100  
4.7/35  
16A, 400  
16A, 400  
16A, 400  
V
V
V
8A, 600V  
8A, 600V  
INPUT CONTROL CABLE CONNECTION  
SCR 102  
SCR 103  
SCR 104  
CR1  
CR2  
CR3  
CR6  
SPST, N.O. FLUX OR WATER  
SPST, N.O. TRAVEL  
16A, 400V  
16A, 400V  
POWER SUPPLY SOURCE POINT  
SPST, N.O. POWER SOURCE OUTPUT  
SPST, N.O. SOLID STATE, OPTIONAL  
LINC-FILL PILOT RELAY  
1A, 400  
V
C1101  
COMMON CONNECTION TO ANALOG POWER  
ARC VOLTAGE BY-PASS  
.0047/3000  
.0047/3000  
.0047/3000  
R101  
R102  
R103  
R104  
R105  
R106  
R107  
R108  
R109  
R110  
R111  
R112  
R113  
R114  
R115  
R116  
TP101  
TP102  
TP103  
40, 12W  
68K  
C1102  
C1103  
C1104  
C1105  
C1106  
(SEE SCHEMATIC "C")  
SUPPLY; 510  
A5H  
150V, 10J  
FLUX SOLENOID BY-PASS  
CR7  
R1  
OPTIONAL LINC-FILL BY-PASS CONTACTOR  
.047/100  
.022/25  
.022/25  
.022/25  
.022/25  
.22/100  
500/50  
1A, 1000  
V
100  
100  
SCHEMATIC LOCATION REFERENCE  
MOTOR FIELD BY-PASS  
10K, 2W  
100  
X101  
X102  
+15V VOLTAGE  
REGULATOR  
-5V VOLTAGE  
REGULATOR  
2, 50W  
HORIZONTAL CO-ORDINATE LETTER  
VERTICAL CO-ORDINATE NUMBER  
SCHEMATIC IDENTIFICATION LETTER  
DZ101  
F101  
5.1 V.,  
1
2
/
W
10K  
47K  
S1  
DPST, CONTROL POWER AND  
EMERGENCY STOP  
SPDT, TRAVEL  
1
/
2A SLOW BLOW,  
4.7K  
6.8K  
680  
S2  
POWER SUPPLIES FUSE  
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, COMPONENT VALUES OF:  
F102  
1
/
2A SLOW BLOW,  
500/50  
CAPACITORS  
=
=
MFD/VOLTS  
T1A  
T1B  
T1C  
T2A  
T2B  
36 VCT, 300mA SECONDARY  
10 VAC, 600mA SECONDARY  
SEE LOGIC SCHEMATIC "D"  
115VAC, 80mA SECONDARY  
24VAC, 30mA SECONDARY  
4.7/35  
FIELD FUSE  
RESISTORS  
OHMS, 2 /WATT  
1
18/15  
47K  
680  
LED 1A  
THRU  
LED 1F  
RED LIGHT  
EMITTING  
DIODE  
SINCE COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY ON  
CIRCUIT BOARD MAY CHANGE WITHOUT AFFECTING THE  
INTERCHANGEABILITY OF COMPLETE BOARD, THIS  
DIAGRAM MAY NOT SHOW THE EXACT COMPONENTS  
A
PRINTED  
.02/600  
.047/100  
.022/25  
.02/600  
.022/25  
4.7K  
3.3K  
68K  
A
PT101  
PT102  
PT103  
1:1:1  
PULSE  
TRANSFORMER  
OR CIRCUITRY OF CONTROLS HAVING  
CODE NUMBER.  
A
COMMON  
A.N.S.I. ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537  
NOTE: Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not avail-  
able from Lincoln Electric. This information is provided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in  
NA-5  
danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the machine.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-6  
G-6  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
POWER PC BOARD (L6252-2 & above) SCHEMATIC  
525  
J3  
P1  
540  
3
5
6
C19  
.047  
100V  
PT1  
CONTROL POWER AND  
EMERGENCY STOP  
0.2mH  
CB1  
S1A  
31  
531  
531A  
631  
R1  
2
OHMS  
C24  
2
50 WATTS  
C7  
4.7  
35V  
FLUX OR WATER  
SOLENOID RECEPTACLE  
500  
TRAVEL  
RECEPTACLE  
531  
87  
PT2  
0.2mH  
C4  
.15  
200V  
3
2
1
531  
QU1  
1
2N6027  
C6  
.047  
100V  
C5  
.047  
100V  
2
1
4
3
5
1
GND  
J2  
531A  
J2  
J1  
.0047  
3000  
25  
3
631  
GND  
SCR2  
2N6398  
SCR1  
2N6398  
.0047  
3000  
532  
BLUE  
P1  
0.2mH  
PT1  
0.2mH  
PT1  
Q9  
600mA  
40V  
WIRE FEED  
MOTOR ARMATURE  
TP1  
150V  
45J  
PT3  
0.2mH  
1
M
C2  
SCR3  
SCR4  
.15  
CR7  
200V  
0.5A  
125V  
2N6403  
2N6403  
C1  
.0047  
1400V  
C21  
.02  
600V  
CR1  
P1  
666  
BLACK  
J1  
2
115VAC  
INPUT  
3
4
3
4
C8  
.047  
100V  
6
PT2  
0.2mH  
D3  
PT3  
0.2mH  
FEED FORWARD  
16A  
P1  
400V  
AUTO  
J1  
2
J3  
WHT  
4
CR6  
587  
.0047  
3000  
627  
C3  
50  
250V  
OFF  
Q2  
CR2  
600mA  
40V  
R2  
S2  
TRAVEL  
.0047  
3000  
HAND  
133K  
J1  
P1  
Q1  
600mA  
40V  
Q3  
600mA  
40V  
1
R18  
RED  
626  
133K  
D1  
16A  
400V  
D2  
0.5A  
125V  
16A  
400V  
ARMATURE SUPPLY  
D8  
J2  
32  
532  
2
525  
S1B  
+15V  
ANALOG  
FIELD SUPPLY  
FIELD DIRECTION  
CIRCUIT  
X1  
J2  
GND  
TP2  
150V  
45J  
IN  
OUT  
7815  
(HS)  
3
500  
J3  
P1  
P1  
525  
4
FOR THE NA-5R ONLY:  
THE TRAVEL RECEPTACLE,THE TRAVEL SWITCH,  
AND CR2 ARE REMOVED ON THE NA-5R.  
GND  
J3  
7
C14  
500  
50V  
525  
B1  
531B  
BLK  
RED  
CR3 IS SHOWN IN THE OPTIONAL BURNBACK KIT  
C16  
4.7  
510  
RECEPTACLE WHICH IS DRAWN BELOW.THE  
18  
VAC  
35V  
ANALOG  
POWER SUPPLY  
BURNBACK KIT IS CONNECTED TO 631 AND 532.  
631  
ZERO VOLT  
REFERENCE  
115 VAC  
B2  
WHT  
4
J3  
8
C13  
532  
T1A  
18  
P1  
.22  
510  
5
DZ1  
5.1V  
1W  
100V  
VAC  
2
C17  
18  
15V  
1
J3  
9
C15  
500  
50V  
P1  
402  
6
510  
RED  
532  
B3  
BLK  
CR3  
404  
3
YLW  
601  
500  
4
-10V  
GND  
2
METER  
SUPPLY  
10 VAC  
T1B  
IN  
OUT  
X2  
NA-5R OPTIONAL BURNBACK  
KIT RECEPTACLE  
J3  
5
P1  
P1  
P1  
500  
500  
500  
602  
610  
SHOWN WITH JUMPER  
PLUG INSTALLED  
YLW  
J3  
6
D9  
2
J2  
J3  
1
6
CR3  
4
610  
D12  
D13  
1N4007  
1N4007  
531B  
ORG  
BLK  
B4  
RELAY  
C18  
.02  
600V  
115  
VAC  
TP3  
150V  
45J  
POWER SUPPLY  
115 VAC  
T2A  
B5  
ORG  
BLK  
532  
D14  
D15  
1N4007  
1N4007  
J2  
BRN  
BRN  
500  
500  
4
24  
VAC  
INTERFACE OPTION  
POWER SUPPLY  
T2B  
F R A N C E  
C A N A D A  
A U S T R A L I A  
NOTE: Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not avail-  
able from Lincoln Electric. This information is provided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in  
NA-5  
danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the machine.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-7  
G-7  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
VOLTAGE PC BOARD SCHEMATIC  
E
F
D
G
C
J
B
H
K
L
M
A
525  
A5H  
525  
A5H  
A
L501  
R533  
R534  
C507  
N.A.  
667  
C524  
WELD  
C520  
+
B
1
525  
A5H  
RESPONSE  
JUMPER  
(RED)  
PIN  
F
R510  
500  
A6H  
R509  
TP  
501  
C1102  
D519  
T501  
D520  
5
+
R527  
D515  
1
2
OCI501  
4
12  
ARC  
531B  
A5D  
+
-
C508  
C518  
VOLTAGE  
PIN  
S
DZ  
507  
14  
4
-
D
POLARITY  
24  
13  
+
115  
VAC  
DZ  
506  
13  
12  
C509  
2
3
CW  
14  
6
10  
9
A
TERMINALS  
R535  
C506  
VAC  
R507  
-
+
+
-
532  
A5D  
X502  
C519  
ACTUAL VOLTAGE  
BUFFER  
A
8
+
B
C1101  
DZ  
637  
D5A  
11  
1
504  
-
Q508  
+
C
C526  
X502  
Q501  
D517  
D506  
C501  
F501  
L502  
X502  
C521  
D522  
D521  
621  
2
POWER SOURCE  
CONTROL INTERFACE  
CONTROL  
AMP  
D502  
CW  
510P  
B3C  
525  
A5H  
GAIN  
START  
D516  
-
6
500  
A6H  
7
510  
D
Q507  
CW  
5
C525  
D505  
510P  
B3C  
+
Q506  
X501  
DZ  
6
1
2
4
5
503  
9
X501  
-
C527  
D503  
D501  
+
8
D504  
B
525  
A5H  
R547  
D513  
AUTO-STOP  
CIRCUIT  
0CI502  
500  
D9C  
+
3
4
510P  
B3C  
C505  
10  
D512  
C523  
D514  
592  
D7A  
C504  
COM  
AUTO-STOP AND  
SHUTDOWN BYPASS  
TAB JUMPER (BLUE)  
510P  
B3C  
AUTO  
R511  
C512  
R519  
ACTUAL VOLTAGE  
METER FILTER  
C517  
+
BYPASS  
D514  
+
+
HOLD - LOW CIRCUIT  
525  
A5H  
SHUTDOWN  
687  
C511  
FROM  
OPTION  
AND  
PROCEDURE  
P.C. BOARD  
PIN  
A
PIN  
B
PIN  
516  
500  
A6H  
D508  
D
2
3
X501  
-
D4B  
514  
1
VOLTAGE  
SETTING  
R546  
C
635  
SBS  
501  
688A  
+
START  
D518  
Q503  
D510  
D511  
RESPONSE  
+
D507  
R525  
4
5
JUMPER  
E2E  
SET  
S7B  
ACTUAL  
C510  
C516  
N.C.  
+
7
X502  
525  
A5H  
(WHITE)  
DZ502  
688  
D4J  
C
R530  
510P  
B3C  
S7B  
VOLTS  
SET-ACTUAL  
-
6
ARC CONTROL  
ENABLE  
517  
11  
4
2
3
1
SET VOLTAGE  
BUFFER  
C522  
C528  
5
6
D509  
+
688  
D4J  
500  
A6H  
C513  
CW  
CAL  
VOLTAGE P.C. BOARD RECEPTACLE FOR  
OPTIONAL PULSED POWER FILTER P. C.  
BOARD (SHOWN WITH JUMPER PLUG  
TP5  
+5V  
500  
A6H  
C604  
SHUTDOWN  
ENABLE  
1
X601  
GND  
2
TP4  
4
INSTALLED.)  
DM601  
OUT  
IN  
SHUTDOW CIRCUIT  
D602  
D601  
A6E  
A6E  
601  
602  
E
C
C603  
A
518  
+
+
C602  
C601  
D603 D604  
510P  
B3C  
510  
B7G  
VOLTMETER  
VOLTMETER  
POWER SUPPLY  
7
VOLTAGE P.C. BOARD  
1A, 400V  
VOLTMETER P.C. BOARD  
COMPONENTS NOT ON P.C. BOARD  
KEY TO SYMBOLS  
C501  
C504  
C505  
C506  
C507  
C508  
C509  
C510  
C511  
C512  
C513  
C514  
C516  
C517  
C518  
C519  
C520  
C521  
C522  
C523  
C524  
C525  
C526  
C527  
C528  
R501  
R502  
R503  
R504  
R505  
R506  
R507  
R508  
R509  
R510  
R511  
R512  
R513  
R514  
R515  
R516  
R517  
R518  
R519  
R520  
R521  
R522  
R523  
R524  
R525  
44.2K, 1/4W, 1%  
R526  
R527  
R528  
R529  
R530  
R531  
R532  
R533  
R534  
R535  
R536  
R537  
R538  
R539  
R540  
R541  
R542  
R543  
R544  
R545  
R546  
R547  
R548  
R549  
.1/100  
4.0/50  
.47/50  
.022/25  
.022/25  
39/20  
.022/25  
1.8/20  
.022/25  
4.7/35  
27/35  
4.7/35  
.022/25  
.47/50  
39/20  
.0047-.005/1400  
.022/25  
.022/25  
.022/25  
.022/25  
4.7/35  
D501  
47K  
F501  
1
8
AMP FAST  
C601  
DIGITAL METER  
/
500/50  
DM601  
S7B  
INPUT CONTROL CABLE CONNECTION  
500 TRIMMER  
THRU  
D522  
47K  
22K  
22K  
27K  
100K  
27K  
10K  
100  
1K  
C602  
C603  
C604  
D601  
D602  
D603  
D604  
4.7/35  
BLOW FUSE  
.022/25  
4.75K, 1/4W, 1%  
100K  
27K  
SBS501 SILICON BILATERAL  
SWITCH  
SPDT, VOLTS SET-ACTUAL  
COMMON CONNECTION TO ANALOG POWER  
.022/25  
6.8V,  
1
2W  
DZ502  
DZ503  
DZ504  
DZ505  
DZ506  
DZ507  
L501  
/
SUPPLY 510  
A5H  
5.1V, 1/2W  
20V, 1W  
T501  
24 VAC, 185 mf  
SECONDARY  
150V, 10J  
15K  
SCHEMATIC LOCATION REFERENCE  
1A, 400V  
6.2V, 1/2W  
15V, 1W  
10K  
TP501  
NOTES:  
2.2K  
HORIZONTAL CO-ORDINATE LETTER  
VERTICAL CO-ORDINATE NUMBER  
SCHEMATIC IDENTIFICATION LETTER  
6.8V, 1/2W  
33uH, 110mA  
33uH, 110mA  
2.7K  
N.A. THESE CAPACITORS ARE LOCATED  
ON THE R.F. BYPASS BOARD.  
(SEE SCHEMATIC A).  
4.7K  
L502  
100K  
1K  
10K  
33K  
56K  
27K  
R601  
R602  
R603  
24.3K, 1/4W, 1%  
2K TRIMMER  
OCI501  
OCI502  
Q501  
Q503  
Q505  
Q506  
Q507  
Q508  
X501  
OPTO-ISOLATOR  
2.7K  
2.80K, 1/4W, 1%  
N.B. SEE L6682-3A SCHEMATIC FOR  
SUPERSEDED G1556-1 VOLAGE  
BOARD.  
2N4123  
2K TRIMMER  
5.6K  
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, COMPONENT VALUES OF:  
2N5816  
X601  
5K TRIMMER  
1K, 12W  
470  
+5V VOLTAGE REGULATOR  
CAPACITORS  
=
MFD/VOLTS  
2N4123  
100K  
1K  
RESISTORS  
=
OHMS, 2 /WATT  
1
2N4857  
N.C. EARLIER VOLTAGE BOARDS DO  
FOR VOLTMETER P.C. BOARDS  
L6685-1 OR HIGHER USE S21143  
SCHEMATIC FOR COMPONENT  
VALUES AND CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS.  
2N5816  
100K  
39K  
SINCE COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY ON  
CIRCUIT BOARD MAY CHANGE WITHOUT AFFECTING THE  
INTERCHANGEABILITY OF COMPLETE BOARD, THIS  
DIAGRAM MAY NOT SHOW THE EXACT COMPONENTS  
A
PRINTED  
68K  
NOT HAVE THIS RECEPTACLE, AND  
LEAD 688A WAS 688.  
2N5816  
15K  
QUAD OP-AMP  
QUAD OP-AMP  
15K  
15K  
A
X502  
56K  
270  
.022/25  
.47/50  
.01/200  
.022/25  
330K  
22K  
270  
OR CIRCUITRY OF CONTROLS HAVING  
CODE NUMBER.  
A
COMMON  
100  
27K  
270  
3.3K  
A.N.S.I. ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537  
NOTE: Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not avail-  
able from Lincoln Electric. This information is provided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in  
NA-5  
danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the machine.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-8  
G-8  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
CONTROL CIRCUIT SCHEMATIC  
C
G
J
A
B
D
E
F
H
K
L
M
525  
A5H  
520  
+10.00V  
C217  
C219  
Q207  
R243  
11 12 10  
1
C209  
C221  
6
2
3
525  
A5H  
512  
CW  
LO  
R221  
D206  
B4E  
B4J  
4
X203  
8
-
9
C208  
C224  
X201  
2
3
10  
5
+
C204  
4
A
R211  
R217  
-
-
X204  
6
5
2
3
1
D
A
+
5
11  
1
+
11  
X202  
7
1
+
4
C202  
Q204  
C229  
+
+
C218  
11  
X203  
C212  
CW  
HI  
C203  
C210  
R231  
3
+
4
CW  
12  
2
CONTROL  
AMP  
13  
+10.00 V  
Q203  
628  
D8A  
C216  
500  
A6H  
7
DZ203  
Q205  
2
3
CAL  
C205  
C201  
QU201  
C220  
REFERENCE  
SUPPLY  
ACTUAL SPEED BUFFER  
C206  
Q206  
510  
A5H  
C225  
C223  
D205  
TACH SIGNAL CONVERTER  
D208  
540  
A1H  
511  
510P  
C211  
C227  
B4E  
511  
X203  
C119  
-
FROM OPTION  
511A  
C214  
525  
A5H  
B5J  
+
13  
12  
SPEED  
SETTING  
AND  
B
R242  
R218  
PT  
632  
525A  
PROCEDURE  
PC BOARD  
101A  
14  
+
C213  
+
C228  
L201  
500  
A6H  
E2D  
500  
A6H  
N.B  
N.A.  
C215  
510P  
B3C  
TO TACH  
PICK-UP  
555  
ARMATURE FIRING CIRCUIT  
SET SPEED BUFFER  
P.C. BOARD  
512  
B1G  
511  
B3G  
SET  
L202  
ACTUAL  
4
5
S7A  
SPEED  
SET-ACTUAL  
R214  
510A  
R212  
SPEEDMETER  
CALIBRATION  
JUMPER  
512  
B1G  
519  
FAST-SLOW  
ACCELER  
JUMPER  
R240  
-
-
9
D204  
8
142T  
CW  
95S  
CW  
142  
95  
57  
57F  
9
8
B
C
10  
10  
+
+
X204  
X203  
PIN  
F
PIN  
S
525  
A5H  
511  
R241  
CW  
CW  
CW  
CW  
525  
A5H  
CW  
CAL  
CAL  
CAL  
CAL  
CAL  
CAL  
TP5  
+5V  
B3G  
1
ACC  
Q201  
X401  
OUT  
GND  
C409  
C408  
C407  
C406  
C405  
C404  
2
4
D202  
DM401  
E
IN  
DZ201  
TP4  
+
D402  
D401  
Q202  
A6E  
601  
602  
6
7
C403  
C207  
C
+
A6E  
+
C222  
C226  
C402  
C401  
D203  
D403  
D404  
D201  
R410  
500  
A6H  
510  
C7E  
510P  
B3C  
586  
FEED  
ENABLE  
SPEEDMETER  
POWER SUPPLY  
SPEEDMETER  
D7J  
ACCELERATION CIRCUIT  
FEED ENABLE CIRCUIT  
CONTROL P.C. BOARD  
SPEEDMETER P.C. BOARD  
TACHOMETER P.C. BOARD  
COMPONENTS NOT ON P.C. BOARD  
KEY TO SYMBOLS  
C201  
DZ201  
DZ202  
DZ203  
6.8 V.,  
16.0 V.,  
3.0 V.,  
1
2
W.  
R201  
1K  
500 TRIMMER  
R227  
R228  
OCI301  
Q301  
OPTO-INTERRUPTER  
2N4123  
.022/25  
.022/25  
18/15  
/
6.8K  
C401  
DIGITAL METER  
500/50  
4.7/35  
DM401  
S7A  
POWER SUPPLY SOURCE POINT  
C202  
C203  
C204  
C205  
C206  
C207  
C208  
C209  
C210  
C211  
C212  
C213  
C214  
C215  
C216  
C217  
THRU  
C229  
1
W.  
R203  
R204  
R205  
R206  
R207  
R208  
R209  
R210  
R211  
R212  
R213  
R214  
R215  
R216  
R217  
R218  
R219  
R220  
R221  
R222  
R223  
R224  
R225  
R226  
10K  
C402  
C403  
THRU  
C409  
D401  
D402  
D403  
D404  
X401  
R401  
R402  
R403  
R404  
R405  
R406  
R407  
R408  
R409  
R410  
R411  
R412  
R413  
R414  
1
W.  
1.00K, 1/4W, 1% R229  
20K TRIMMER  
27K  
SPDT SPEED SET-ACTUAL  
COMMON CONNECTION TO ANALOG POWER  
SUPPLY; 510 A5H  
.022/25  
4.7/35  
2.94K, 1.4W, 1%  
R230  
R231  
R232  
R233  
R234  
R235  
R236  
R237  
R238  
R239  
R240  
R241  
R242  
R243  
L201  
L202  
15K  
10K  
R301  
R302  
R304  
1K  
15K  
1.3K  
.0033/200  
.47/50  
15  
100  
330 uH, 110mA  
SCHEMATIC LOCATION REFERENCE  
18/15  
4/50  
100K TRIMMER  
6.8K  
2.7K  
10K  
1A, 400V  
Q201  
Q202  
Q203  
Q204  
Q205  
Q206  
Q207  
2N4123  
2N4123  
2N4123  
2N4125  
BS170  
2N4123  
2N5816  
33K  
HORIZONTAL CO-ORDINATE LETTER  
VERTICAL CO-ORDINATE NUMBER  
SCHEMATIC IDENTIFICATION LETTER  
.047/100  
4.7/35  
10K  
+5V VOLTAGE REGULATOR  
270  
15K  
.15/200  
.022/25  
.022/25  
4.7/35  
15K  
10K  
2K TRIMMER  
17.8K, 1/4W, 1%  
2.80K, 1/4W, 1%  
2K TRIMMER  
18.2K, 1/4W, 1%  
5K TRIMMER  
33.2K, 1/4W, 1%  
5K TRIMMER  
52.3K 1/4W, 1%  
10  
5K TRIMMER  
31.6K, 1/4W, 1%  
5K TRIMMER  
51.1K, 1/4W, 1%  
47K  
1M  
15K  
15K  
NOTES:  
100K  
5.6K  
15K  
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, COMPONENT VALUES OF:  
N.A. 511 IS CONNECTED TO 511A  
BY CONNECTION TO  
18/15  
100pf/100  
1K  
CAPACITORS  
RESISTORS  
=
=
MFD/VOLTS  
QU201  
2N6027  
1K  
270  
OHMS, 2 /WATT  
1
VOLTAGE P.C. BOARD.  
1K  
10  
.022/25  
33K  
SINCE COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY ON  
CIRCUIT BOARD MAY CHANGE WITHOUT AFFECTING THE  
INTERCHANGEABILITY OF COMPLETE BOARD, THIS  
DIAGRAM MAY NOT SHOW THE EXACT COMPONENTS  
A
PRINTED  
N.B. THESE COMPONENTS ARE  
LOCATED ON POWER P.C.  
X201  
X202  
X203  
X204  
VOLTAGE REGULATOR  
F- TO -V CONVERTER  
QUAD OP-AMP  
50K TRIMMER  
15K  
A
D201  
THRU  
D206  
D208  
10K TRIMMER  
BOARD (SEE SCHEMATIC A).  
QUAD OP-AMP  
33K  
100K  
1K  
1A, 400  
V
OR CIRCUITRY OF CONTROLS HAVING  
CODE NUMBER.  
A
COMMON  
10K  
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537.  
NOTE: Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not avail-  
able from Lincoln Electric. This information is provided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in  
NA-5  
danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the machine.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-9  
G-9  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
PROCEDURE PC BOARD SCHEMATIC  
OPTIONAL  
OPTIONAL  
OPTIONAL  
START MODULE  
WELD TIMER MODULE  
CRATER MODULE  
BURNBACK TIMER  
J19  
515  
5
515  
500  
520  
+5V  
FROM LOGIC  
POWER  
TIMER BOARD  
TIMER BOARD  
SUPPLIES  
J19  
J19  
500  
-10V  
ON LOGIC PCB  
500  
655  
515  
I
O
500  
655  
515  
I
O
15  
3
520  
+10V  
FROM REF  
VOLTAGE ON  
CONTROL PCB  
C1  
18  
OPTION BOARD  
OPTION BOARD  
15V  
TIMER BOARD  
TIMER BOARD  
J19  
2
510P  
510P  
520  
515  
562  
635  
11  
562  
12  
500  
13  
655  
14  
632  
15  
515  
655  
500  
510P  
520  
515  
562  
635  
11  
562  
12  
500  
13  
655  
14  
632  
15  
515  
655  
500  
584  
583  
588A  
588  
O
1
I
584  
583  
588A  
588  
O
1
I
N.B.  
N.C.  
7
1
2
3
4
6
8
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
6
8
9
2
3
4
5
6
J9  
J11  
J11  
J11  
J11  
J11  
J11  
J11  
J11  
J11  
J11  
J11  
J11  
J11  
J9  
J9  
J9  
J9  
J9  
J10  
J10  
J10  
J10  
J10  
J10  
J10  
J10  
J10  
J10  
J10  
J10  
J10  
J8  
J8  
J8  
J8  
J8  
J8  
J19  
J18  
START TIME INITIATE  
WELD TIME OVER  
520  
+10V  
515  
+5V  
500  
-10V  
515  
+5V  
500  
-10V  
520  
+10V  
515  
+5V  
500  
-10V  
515  
+5V  
500  
-10V  
8
584S  
565  
2
J19  
J19  
CRATER TIME INITIATE  
CURRENT  
7
9
584C  
588  
LOGIC  
PCB  
J19  
START TIME OVER/WELD TIME INITIATE  
1
583S  
J19  
J18  
CRATER TIME OVER/BURNBACK TIME INITIATE  
BURNBACK TIME OVER  
6
3
583C  
566  
100 Hz  
TIME BASE  
OUTPUT  
1.6384 MHz  
TEST POINT  
16  
1
Q12  
Q13  
Q14  
Q6  
Vdd  
OUT2  
Q8  
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
14  
13  
15  
10  
11  
Q9  
X2  
Q10  
Q5  
TO SET  
SPEED BUFFER  
ON CONTROL PCB  
Q7  
OUT1  
CLK  
RES  
J19  
J19  
632  
635  
10  
11  
Q4  
R20  
8
12  
Vss  
10M  
TO SET  
VOLTAGE BUFFER  
ON VOLTAGE PCB  
MC14060  
7.68K  
1/2W  
TIME BASE  
FOR  
DIGITAL TIMERS  
Y1  
C9  
515  
+5V  
C2  
22p  
100V  
C3  
47p  
100V  
1.6384MHz  
520  
+10V  
2.21K  
500  
-10V  
N.E.  
FRAME  
C6  
C7  
5.62K  
5.62K  
4.75K  
5.62K  
5.62K  
LED1  
LED2  
LED3  
LED4  
4.75K  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D1  
Q1  
600mA  
40V  
Q2  
600mA  
40V  
STRIKE  
START  
D6  
WELD  
CRATER  
D8  
CW  
CW  
CW  
10K  
2W  
CW  
WELD  
VOLTS  
STRIKE  
VOLTS  
10K  
2W  
10K  
2W  
10K  
2W  
8
9
3
4
11  
10  
2
1
X1  
A
X1  
B
5
X1  
C
D
X1  
N.E.  
N.E.  
N.E.  
N.E.  
STRIKE  
SPEED  
WELD  
SPEED  
D5  
D7  
6
12  
13  
STRIKE PROCEDURE  
DISABLE  
D9  
J18  
1
561  
D10  
D11  
47.5K  
267  
1.82K  
47.5K  
26.7K  
332  
26.7K  
1.82K  
STRIKE PROCEDURE  
ENABLE  
LOGIC  
PCB  
J19  
13  
563  
STRIKE MODE SETTINGS  
WELD MODE SETTINGS  
J19  
WELD PROCEDURE ENABLE  
14  
564  
515  
+5V  
PROCEDURE KIT  
N.D.  
520  
RECEPTACLE  
J19  
J18  
WELD PROCEDURE ENABLE  
START DISABLE  
+10V  
4
4
564A  
NOTES  
:
WELD  
START  
2
16  
N.A. SINCE COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY ON  
A
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD MAY CHANGE  
581  
WITHOUT AFFECTING THE INTERCHANGEABILITY OF COMPLETE BOARD, THIS DIAGRAM MAY  
A
8
9
10  
11  
3
4
5
CRATER  
14  
STRIKE  
STRIKE  
NOT SHOW THE EXACT COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY OF CONTROLS HAVING  
NUMBER.  
A
COMMON CODE  
X2  
S1  
A
S1  
B
C4  
C8  
4.7  
35V  
N.B.  
N.C.  
A
JUMPER PLUG CONNECTS 584S TO 583S WHEN THE OPTIONAL START MODULE IS  
C5  
X1  
LOGIC  
PCB  
MC14060  
8
NOT INSTALLED.  
PRESET MODE  
SELECTOR  
A
JUMPER PLUG CONNECTS 584C TO 583C WHEN THE OPTIONAL START MODULE IS  
NOT INSTALLED. ALSO, LOGIC CIRCUIT 694 LEAD MUST BE MOVED FROM PIN P10  
TO PIN P8.  
4066B  
C2  
C1  
START DISABLE  
J18  
J18  
5
6
581A  
560  
N.E.  
7
N.D. 564 IS CONNECTED TO 564A BY  
A
LEAD RECEPTACLE JUMPER PLUG, WHICH IS  
D12  
PRESET MONITOR ENABLE  
REMOVED WHEN THE OPTIONAL MULTI-PROCEDURE KIT IS INSTALLED.  
N.E. R2, R5, R8, R11 AND S1 ARE CONNECTED TO FRAME BY PCB TRACES AND MOUNTING  
SCREW, FOR ESD.  
POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION  
AND BYPASSING  
500  
-10V  
NOTE: Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not avail-  
able from Lincoln Electric. This information is provided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in  
NA-5  
danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the machine.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G-10  
G-10  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
OPTION & TIMER PC BOARD SCHEMATICS  
F
G
L
M
E
H
J
K
A
B
C
D
515  
D8C  
515  
D8C  
515  
0
D001  
D002  
583  
TIME  
OVER  
D8C  
R016  
TIMER BOARD  
6
5
X002  
A
R017  
I
OVER  
4
3
X901  
A
D901  
R901  
8
9
515  
D8C  
1
5
6
R015  
10  
O
515  
D8C  
INITIATE  
500  
D9C  
X901  
B
R916  
C004  
500  
D9C  
4
OVER  
D902  
500  
D9C  
D003  
588A  
1
1
1
15  
9
15  
9
15  
9
7
Q1  
7
Q1  
7
Q1  
N.C.  
584  
TIME  
INITIATE  
X002  
B
1
R018  
515  
D8C  
6
6
6
3
3
3
R014  
Q4  
Q3  
Q4  
Q3  
Q4  
Q3  
Q2  
Q2  
Q2  
C
0
C
0
C
0
PE  
CF  
PE  
CF  
PE  
CF  
2
D004  
13  
520  
B1C  
13  
12  
12  
12  
13  
500  
D9C  
1
15  
9
7
X902  
X903  
X904  
4
4
4
INH  
INH  
INH  
6
3
Q4  
Q1  
Q3  
Q2  
C002  
C
632  
B3F  
635  
C4A  
10  
10  
10  
MR  
MR  
MR  
DP1  
12  
4
13  
DP4  
2
DP4  
2
DP4  
2
0
DP3  
14  
DP2  
11  
DP1  
DP3  
14  
DP2  
11  
DP1  
DP3  
14  
DP2  
11  
X002  
D
X002  
C
588  
CURRENT  
Q001  
SPEED  
8
9
13  
12  
CW  
8
CW  
X905  
2
3
10  
5
5
5
R012  
11  
X001  
X001  
INH  
VOLTS  
9
B
A
4
3
10  
MR  
DP1  
5
515  
D8C  
5
6
DP4  
2
DP3  
14  
DP2  
11  
515  
D8C  
515  
D8C  
515  
D8C  
Q002  
510P  
B3C  
PROCEDURE  
ENABLE  
562  
FROM  
655  
500  
D9C  
500  
D9C  
500  
D9C  
PROCEDURE  
R914  
C907  
500  
D9C  
PC BOARD  
100 HZ TIME  
S901A  
MOST SIGNIFICANT DIGIT  
S901B  
S901C  
LEAST SIGNIFICANT DIGIT  
OPTION BOARD  
BASE OUTPUT  
500  
D9C  
4
5
6
7
8
KEY TO SYMBOLS  
FOR OPTION P.C. BOARD L6246-2  
OR HIGHER USE M16795 SCHEMATIC  
FOR COMPONENT VALUES AND  
CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS.  
COMMON CONNECTION TO ANALOG POWER SUPPLY  
SCHEMATIC LOCATION REFERENCE  
HORIZONTAL CO-ORDINATE LETTER  
VERTICAL CO-ORDINATE NUMBER  
SCHEMATIC IDENTIFICATION LETTER  
TIMER P.C. BOARD  
OPTION P.C. BOARD  
2N 4125  
2N 4123  
C902  
THRU  
C906  
C907  
C001  
Q001  
Q002  
.022/25  
.022/25  
5.6K  
THRU  
C004  
520  
515  
D8C  
100pf/100  
QUAD ANALOG  
SWITCH  
X001  
X002  
N.C. X905 AND C906 ARE USED ONLY ON 100 SECOND  
TIMER BOARDS. BOARD JUMPER IS USED ON 10  
SECOND TIMER BOARDS.  
R001  
R002  
R003  
R004  
R005  
R006  
R007  
R008  
R009  
R010  
R011  
R012  
THRU  
R016  
R017  
R018  
1A, 400  
1A, 400  
10K, 2W MULTI-TURN POT  
QUAD  
2
INPUT  
D901  
D902  
B1C  
14  
14  
X002  
7
330  
5.6K  
NAND GATE  
X001  
C003  
1213  
1
2
10  
C001  
7
11  
10K, 2W MULTI-TURN POT  
R901  
THRU  
R915  
R916  
D001  
THRU  
D004  
510P  
B3C  
500  
D9C  
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, COMPONENT VALUES OF:  
22K, 1/4W  
1.8K  
4.7K  
47K  
27K  
22K  
47K  
1A, 400V  
9
CAPACITORS  
=
=
MFD/VOLTS  
RESISTORS  
OHMS, 2 /WATT  
1
1K  
515  
D6C  
N.C.  
QUAD 2-INPUT NAND GATE  
X901  
X902  
THRU  
X904  
X905  
SINCE COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY ON  
BOARD MAY CHANGE WITHOUT AFFECTING THE INTERCHANGE-  
ABILITY OF COMPLETE BOARD, THIS DIAGRAM MAY NOT  
SHOW THE EXACT COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY OF CONTROLS  
HAVING COMMON CODE NUMBER.  
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537  
A
PRINTED CIRCUIT  
16  
X902  
8
16  
X903  
8
16  
X904  
16  
X905  
8
14  
X901  
PROGRAMMABLE  
DIVIDE-BY-N  
COUNTER  
A
22K, 1/4W  
C904  
8
1213  
1
2
7
C906  
C903  
C902  
500  
D9C  
1K  
1K  
A
3
DIGIT BCD THUMBWHEEL  
X906  
POWER SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION AND BYPASSING  
SWITCH  
NOTE: Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not avail-  
able from Lincoln Electric. This information is provided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in  
danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs cDoouwldnloraedsfurolmt iWnwdwa.Smoamgaenuatols.tchome.mAllaMcahniunaels. Search And Download.  
NA-5  
G-11  
G-11  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
METER PC BOARD SCHEMATIC & LAYOUT  
2 1 1 S 4 3  
514 515  
511 512  
SET  
ACTUAL  
510A  
510B  
516  
513  
WIRE  
SPEED  
VOLTS  
TO DIGITAL METER  
10 VAC  
562  
TP4  
4
510C  
E
+5V  
510  
+5V  
518  
A
B
3
2
1
5
4
C
D
517  
B5  
518  
510  
B2  
510C  
B3  
602  
B4  
601  
B1  
6
3
10  
8
2
1
7
9
5
B6  
J14  
J14  
J14  
J14  
J14  
J14  
J14  
J14  
J14  
J14  
D1  
24.3K  
D5  
X1  
TP5  
C4  
CW  
D2  
2K  
OUT  
IN  
C1  
C2  
500  
50V  
4.7  
35V  
GND  
D3  
C3  
2.8K  
TP4  
D4  
NOTES  
N.A.  
:
FILE: S21143_1CA  
LABELS  
GENERAL INFORMATION  
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS PER E1537  
SINCE COMPONENTS OR CIRCUITRY ON  
CIRCUIT BOARD MAY CHANGE  
A
PRINTED  
FRAME CONNECTION  
WITHOUT AFFECTING  
COMPLETE BOARD.  
SHOW THE EXACT COMPONENTS  
SUPPLY  
VOLTAGE NET  
CAPACITORS  
RESISTORS  
DIODES  
=
MFD  
(
(
.022/50V  
1/4W UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)  
(UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)  
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED)  
THE INTERCHANGEABILITY  
THIS DIAGRAM MAY NOT  
OF  
A
POWER SUPPLY SOURCE POINT  
COMMON CONNECTION  
=
Ohms  
EARTH GROUND CONNECTION  
OR CIRCUITRY OF  
CONTROLS HAVING  
A
COMMON  
CODE NUMBER.  
=
1A, 400V  
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCE  
ON HOLES SIZES PER E-2056  
EQUIP.  
TYPE  
Ch'ge.Sht.No.  
LN-9, LN-9F, NA-5  
THE LINCOLN ELECTRIC CO.  
CLEVELAND, OHIO U.S.A.  
3-25-94  
ON  
ON  
2
3
PLACE DECIMALS IS  
PLACE DECIMALS IS  
+
+
.O2  
.OO2  
METER BOARD SCHEMATIC  
SUBJECT  
ON ALL ANGLES IS  
+
.5 OF  
A
DEGREE  
NONE  
SCALE  
MATERIAL TOLERANCE ("t") TO AGREE  
WITH PUBLISHED STANDARDS  
SHT.  
9-23-93  
FM  
DR.  
DATE  
CHK.  
SUP'S'D'G.  
NO.  
S
21143  
517  
R1  
IDENTIFICATION  
REQ'D  
PART NO.  
ITEM  
C4  
R2  
R3  
601  
C3  
510C  
602  
518  
510  
J14  
C2  
D2  
D1  
D4  
D3  
D5  
L6685-1  
METER  
X1  
C1  
NOTE: Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not avail-  
able from Lincoln Electric. This information is provided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in  
danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs cDoouwldnloraedsfurolmt iWnwdwa.Smoamgaenuatols.tchome.mAllaMcahniunaels. Search And Download.  
NA-5  
G-12  
G-12  
ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS  
MISCELLANEOUS PC BOARDS  
LOGIC BOARD  
POWER BOARD  
REQ'D  
IDENTIFICATION  
ITEM  
PART NO.  
ITEM  
REQ'D  
PART NO.  
IDENTIFICATION  
R47  
C35  
C3  
R46  
NA-5 LOGIC  
SCR3  
Q15  
R49  
D33  
LED 7E  
LED 7D  
L6242-2  
C34  
R13  
LED1F  
D12  
LED 7B  
LED 7C  
LED 7J  
D13  
D15  
D14  
R17  
R16  
R15  
R29  
R12  
C11  
R10  
TP1  
C1  
+
R38  
R50  
R36  
D14  
C7  
D11  
R32  
R59  
R31  
C28  
C29  
C19  
C17  
C15  
D30  
D31  
C2  
R5  
R15  
R34  
D9  
R17  
R4  
X7  
X6  
X2  
DZ1  
SCR4  
C16  
R5  
C17  
C18  
C14  
X1  
R6  
C6  
D7  
D6  
R40  
C27  
R54  
D16  
D27  
D15  
D8  
Q11  
X3  
X4  
C5  
X5  
R19  
R18  
R52  
C4  
J3  
R24  
R55  
C25  
Q9  
R39  
Q8  
R33  
R42  
Q4  
C26  
R57  
R44  
Q13  
C22  
C33  
Q2  
X8  
Q3  
Q10  
Q1  
C1  
C20  
R9  
R8  
D4  
D5  
R7  
R11  
R23  
R61  
C20  
R1  
C30  
LED 7A  
C31  
R53  
Q18  
Q17  
C7  
LED1A  
Q3  
C11  
R12  
R19  
R21  
X9  
Q2  
R28  
C22  
R60  
R27  
R30  
Q9  
Q5  
LED 7G  
LED 7K  
LED 7H  
C13  
D3  
D4  
D7  
C8  
S2  
S1  
C12  
B2  
B1  
CAPACITORS  
RESISTORES  
=
MFD/VOLTS  
OHMS  
=
PROCEDURE BOARD  
BYPASS BOARD  
6 2 7  
ITEM  
REQ'D  
PART NO.  
DESCRIPTION  
R11  
R8  
R5  
R2  
C6  
C5  
C4  
C3  
C2  
C1  
C5  
BURNBACK  
C1  
C9  
START  
J8  
J9  
X1  
CRATER  
WELD  
J10  
J11  
J19  
Q2  
C6  
C3  
C7  
Q1  
R18  
R14  
CAPACITORS = MFD/VOLTS  
D8  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D10  
B1  
Y1  
X2  
D12  
J18  
FRAME  
C2  
S1  
NOTE: Lincoln Electric assumes no responsibility for liablilities resulting from board level troubleshooting. PC Board repairs will invalidate your factory warranty. Individual Printed Circuit Board Components are not avail-  
able from Lincoln Electric. This information is provided for reference only. Lincoln Electric discourages board level troubleshooting and repair since it may compromise the quality of the design and may result in  
NA-5  
danger to the Machine Operator or Technician. Improper PC board repairs could result in damage to the machine.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Lathem Clock AT MSX User Manual
Liebherr Refrigerator RU500 User Manual
Life Fitness Elliptical Trainer 90X 0XXX 01 User Manual
Linear Food Processor DUAL 824 User Manual
Link electronic Stereo Amplifier DigiFlex 1152 User Manual
Magnavox VCR DV225MG9 User Manual
Makita Trimmer BUR141 User Manual
Marshall electronic Flat Panel Television V R82DP HDA User Manual
Maytag Washer MFS18 User Manual
Mercury Marine Boat 899197001 User Manual